2002 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL

on

  • 1,201 views

Classic Cars Nissan offers you excellent sales and service on new or used Nissan vehicles. Stop in and test drive a 2002 NISSAN PATHFINDER or any car or truck today! We're located Hainesport New ...

Classic Cars Nissan offers you excellent sales and service on new or used Nissan vehicles. Stop in and test drive a 2002 NISSAN PATHFINDER or any car or truck today! We're located Hainesport New Jersey between Cherry Hill and Mount Holly. Only 20 minutes from Philadelphia. Classic Cars Nissan 1513 Route 38 Hainesport, NJ 08036 866-CLASSIC or 866-252-7742

Statistics

Views

Total Views
1,201
Views on SlideShare
1,200
Embed Views
1

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
2
Comments
0

1 Embed 1

http://www.docshut.com 1

Accessibility

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

2002 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL 2002 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL Presentation Transcript

  • ForewordWelcome to the growing family of new READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE For descriptions specified for four wheel driveNISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to SAFELY models, a mark is placed at the begin-you with confidence. It was produced using ning of the applicable sections/items.the latest techniques and strict quality control. Before driving your vehicle please read your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will As with other vehicles with features forThis manual was prepared to help you under- ensure familiarity with controls and main- offroad use, failure to operate four wheelstand the operation and maintenance of your tenance requirements, assisting you in the drive models correctly may result in lossvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of safe operation of your vehicle. of control or an accident. For additionaldriving pleasure. Please read through this information, see “Driving your four wheelmanual before operating your vehicle. drive safely” in the “5. Starting and driv- WARNING ing” section.A separate “Service and MaintenanceGuide” and “Warranty Information Book-let” explains details about the warranties IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-covering your vehicle and vehicle mainte- TION ON-PAVEMENT AND OFFROADnance schedules. Additionally, a separate REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! DRIVINGCustomer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. Follow these important driving rules to This vehicle will handle and maneuveronly) will explain how to resolve any con- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip differently from an ordinary passengercerns you may have with your vehicle, as for you and your passengers! car because it has a higher center ofwell as clarify your rights under your ¼ Never drive under the influence of al- gravity for offroad use. As with otherstate’s lemon law. cohol or drugs. vehicles with features of this type, fail- ¼ Always observe posted speed limits ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayYour NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. and never drive too fast for condi- result in loss of control or an accident.When you require any service or have any tions. For additional information, see “On-questions, they will be glad to assist you with ¼ Always use your seat belts and appro- pavement and offroad driving precau-the extensive resources available to them. priate child restraint systems. Pre- tions” and “Avoiding collision and roll- teen children should be seated in the over” in the “5. Starting and driving” rear seat. section. ¼ Always provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ¼ Always review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information. ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MODIFICATION OF YOUR IMPORTANT INFORMATIONVEHICLE ABOUT THIS MANUALThis vehicle should not be modified. Modi- You will see various symbols in this manual.fication could affect its performance, They are used in the following ways:safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems result- WARNINGing from modification may not be coveredunder NISSAN warranties. This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or seriousWHEN READING THE MANUAL personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followedThis manual includes information for all precisely.options available on this model. Therefore,you may find some information that does SIC0697not apply to your vehicle. CAUTION If you see this symbol, it means Do not doAll information, specifications and illustrations this or Do not let this happen.in this manual are those in effect at the time of This is used to indicate the presence of aprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to change hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to yourspecifications or design at any time without vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, thenotice. procedures must be followed carefully. ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING WARNING Engine Exhaust, some of its constitu- ents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. © 2001 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. TOKYO, JAPANAll rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual maybe reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or trans-mitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, withoutthe prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Welcome To The World Of NISSAN portation services to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories. NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and computers in automobiles, and has led the indus- try in improving both performance and fuel effi- ciency through new engine designs and the use of synthetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The company has also developed ways to build quality into its vehicles at each stage of the production process, both through extensive use of automation and — most importantly — through an awareness that people are the cen- tral element in quality control. From the time the parts arrived from our suppli- ers until you took delivery of your new Nissan, WFW0002 dozens of checks were made to ensure that only the best job was being done in producing andYour new NISSAN is the result of our dedication the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing delivering your vehicle. NISSAN also takes greatto produce the finest in safe, reliable and eco- facility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling care to ensure that when you take your NISSANnomical transportation. Your vehicle is the prod- design at Nissan Design International in San to your dealer for maintenance, the service tech-uct of a successful worldwide company that Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan nician will perform his work according to themanufactures cars and trucks in over 17 coun- Technical Center North America in Farmington quality standards that have been established bytries and distributes them in 170 nations. Hills, Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs the factory. nearly 18,000 people throughout the UnitedNISSAN vehicles are designed and manufac- States, Canada, and Mexico. An additional Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. Astured by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was 71,000 people work for the 1,500 NISSAN and you know, seat belts are an integral part of thefounded in Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN INFINITI dealers across North America. safety systems that will help protect you and youraffiliates world wide, collectively growing to be- passengers in the event of a sudden stop or ancome the fifth largest automaker in the world. In NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the accident. We urge you to use the seat belts everyaddition to cars and trucks, NISSAN also makes Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its sup- time you drive the vehicle.forklift trucks, marine engines, boats and other pliers and over 140 dealers employ approxi-diversified products. mately 4,500 people. These include company The NISSAN story of growth and achievement employees and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all reflects our major goal: to provide you, ourNISSAN has made a substantial and growing across Canada. In addition, many Canadians customer, with a vehicle that is built with qualityinvestment in North America. NISSAN’S commit- work for companies that supply NISSAN and and craftsmanship — a product that we can bement is nearly $4 billion dollars in capital invest- NISSAN dealers with materials and services proud to build and you can be proud to own.ments in facilities across the continent. Some of ranging from operation of port facilities and trans- ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAMNISSAN CARES ...Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSANdealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to NISSAN with the informationNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you the following information: on the left at:would like to provide NISSAN directly with — Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. mainland and Alaska customerscomments or questions, please contact our number Nissan North America, Inc.(NISSAN’s) Consumer Affairs Department us- — Vehicle identification number (on dash- Consumer Affairs Departmenting our toll-free number: board) P.O. Box 191 — Date of purchase Gardena, California 90248-0191For U.S. mainland customers For Hawaii customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647- — Current odometer reading — Your NISSAN dealer’s name Nissan Motor Corporation in Hawaii 7261) 2880 Kilihau St. — Your comments or questionsFor Hawaii customers Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 OR (808) 836-0888 (Oahu Number) For Canada customersFor Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 1-800-387-0122 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Table of Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systemsContents Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systemsSeats ......................................................................... 1-2 Pregnant women ................................................ 1-25 Front manual seat adjustment ............................. 1-2 Injured persons................................................... 1-25 Front power seat adjustment ............................... 1-4 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............ 1-25 Rear seat adjustment ........................................... 1-6 Two-point type seat belt without retractor (Center of Head restraint adjustment .................................... 1-9 rear seat) ............................................................ 1-29 Armrest ................................................................. 1-9 Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-30Supplemental restraint system................................ 1-10 Seat belt maintenance ....................................... 1-31 Precautions on supplemental restraint Child restraints ........................................................ 1-31 system ................................................................ 1-10 Precautions on child restraints ........................... 1-31 Supplemental air bag warning labels ................. 1-20 Installation on rear seat center position ............. 1-33 Supplemental air bag warning light.................... 1-21 Installation on rear seat outboard positions ....... 1-35Seat belts ................................................................ 1-22 Top tether strap child restraint ........................... 1-40 Precautions on seat belt usage ......................... 1-23 Installation on front passenger seat ................... 1-42 Child safety......................................................... 1-24 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SEATS FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING ¼ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ¼ After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely SSS0133 locked. WARNING ¼ For most effective protection when See “Automatic seat positioner” in the “3. the vehicle is in motion, the seat Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto- ¼ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when should be upright. Always sit well matic seat positioner operation. the seatback is reclined. This can be back in the seat and adjust the seat dangerous. The shoulder belt will not belt properly. See “Precautions on be against your body. In an accident seat belt usage” later in this section you could be thrown into it and re- for precautions on seat belt usage. ceive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.1-2 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0169 SSS0168Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sPull the lever up while you slide the seat To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and seat)forward or backward to the desired position. lean back. To bring the seatback forward Turn either dial to adjust the angle and heightRelease the lever to lock the seat in position. again, pull the lever and move your body of the seat cushion to the desired position. forward. The seatback will move forward. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING ¼ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ¼ Do not leave children unattended in- side the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls which could cause a serious acci- SPA0465 dent.Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat) Operating tipsTurn the lever forward or backward to adjust ¼ The motor has an auto-reset overload pro-the seat lumbar area. tection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. ¼ Do not operate the power support seat for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.1-4 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0148 SSS0166Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifterMoving the switch forward or backward will Move the recline switch backward until the Push the front or rear end of the switch up orslide the seat forward or backward to the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seat- down to adjust the angle and height of the seatdesired position. back forward again, move the switch forward cushion. and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPA0465Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)Turn the lever forward or backward to adjustthe seat lumbar area.1-6 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ¼ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. ¼ Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide signifi- cant protection against injury in an IC0371 accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been re-REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT moved for any reason.Before folding down the seat, put the buckle in WARNING ¼ If the head restraints are removed forthe storange of the seatback to avoid dropping any reason, they should be securelyit under the seat cushion. ¼ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it stored to prevent them from causingFolding is in the fold-down position. Use of injury to passengers or damage to these areas by passengers without the vehicle in case of sudden braking1. Remove the head restraints. proper restraints could result in seri- or an accident.2. Pull the strap forward and fold the seat cushion up. ous injury in an accident or sudden ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- stop. vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not3. Pull the lever and pull the seatback forward place cargo higher than the seat- to fold it down. ¼ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a backs. In a sudden stop or collision,4. When resetting the seat, be sure to install the head restraints. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • unsecured cargo could cause per- you could be thrown into it and re- sonal injury. ceive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap ¼ When returning the seatbacks to the belt and receive serious internal inju- upright position, be certain they are ries. completely secured in the latched po- sition. If they are not completely se- ¼ For most effective protection when cured in the right position, passen- the vehicle is in motion, the seat gers may be injured in an accident or should be upright. Always sit well sudden stop. back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See “Seat belts” later in this section for precautions on seat belt usage. IC0385 ¼ After adjustment, check to be sure Reclining (if so equipped) the seat is securely locked. Pull the reclining lever and position the seat back at the desired angle. Release the reclin- ing lever after positioning the seat at the desired angle. WARNING ¼ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident1-8 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0125 SSS0178 SPA0351HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the head restraints so the center is level ARMREST with the center of your ears. Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal. WARNING Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjust- ment after someone else uses the seat.To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. Tolower, push the lock knob and push the headrestraint down. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEMPRECAUTIONS ON instructions and precautions on seat belt us-SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT age.)SYSTEM After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warningThis Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) light illuminates. The supplemental air bagsection contains important information con- warning light will turn off after about 7cerning the driver and passenger supplemen- seconds if the systems are operational.tal front air bags, supplemental side air bagsand pre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force tothe face and chest of the driver and frontpassenger in certain frontal collisions.Supplemental side air bag system (if soequipped): This system can help cushion theimpact force to the head and chest area of thedriver and front passenger in certain sideimpact collisions. The supplemental side airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protectionprovided by the driver and front passengerseat belts and are not a substitute for them.Seat belts should always be correctly wornand the driver and front passenger seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and front door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” later in this section for1-10 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. ¼ Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates. SSS0131 WARNING you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. Front air bags inflate with¼ The supplemental front air bags ordi- great force. If you are unrestrained, narily will not inflate in the event of a leaning forward, sitting sideways or side impact, rear impact, roll over, or out of position in any way, you are at lower severity frontal collision. Al- greater risk of injury or death in a ways wear your seat belts to help crash and may also receive serious reduce the risk or severity of injury in or fatal injuries from the supplemen- various kinds of accidents. tal front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back¼ The seat belts and the supplemental against the seatback and as far away front air bags are most effective when as practical from the steering wheel Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0132 SSS00061-12 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0007 SSS0008 SSS0009 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0099 SSS0100 SSS0101 For supplemental side air bag bag inflates if they are not properly WARNING restrained. system (if so equipped): ¼ Never let children ride unrestrained ¼ Never install a rear facing child re- WARNING or extend their hands or face out of straint in the front seat. An inflating the window. Do not attempt to hold supplemental front air bag could se- ¼ The supplemental side air bags ordi- them in your lap or arms. Some ex- riously injury or kill your child. See narily will not inflate in the event of a amples of dangerous riding positions “Child restraints” later in this section frontal impact, rear impact or lower are shown in the previous illustra- for details. severity side collision. Always wear tions. your seat belts to help reduce the risk ¼ Children may be severely injured or or severity of injury in various kinds killed when the supplemental front air of accidents.1-14 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0140 SSS0159 SSS0162¼ The seat belts and the supplemental shown in the previous illustrations. side air bag are most effective when ¼ When sitting in the rear seat, do not you are sitting well back and upright hold onto the seatback of the front in the seat. Supplemental side air bag seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates with great force. Do not allow inflates, you may be seriously in- anyone to place their hand, leg or jured. Be especially careful with chil- face near the supplemental side air dren, who should always be properly bag on the side of the seatback of the restrained. front seat. Do not allow anyone sit- ¼ Do not use seat covers on the front ting in the front seat to extend their seatbacks. They may interfere with hand out of the window or lean supplemental side air bag inflation. against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the occupant. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or dashboard. Since the supplemental front air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupant, the force of the front air bag inflating SSS0138B can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the air bag moduleSupplemental front air bag system severity frontal collisions, although they may during inflation. inflate if the forces in another type of collisionThe driver supplemental air bag is located in are similar to those of a higher severity frontal The air bags will deflate quickly after a collisionthe center of the steering wheel; the front impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal is over.passenger supplemental air bag is mounted in collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is notthe dashboard above the glove box. These After turning the ignition key to the ON always an indication of proper supplementalsystems are designed to meet optional certifi- position, the supplemental air bag warning air bag operation. light illuminates. The supplemental air bagcation requirements under U.S. regulations.They are also permitted in Canada. The op- When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a warning light will turn off after about 7tional certification allows front air bags to be fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by seconds if the system is operational.designed to inflate somewhat less forcefully release of smoke. This smoke is not harmfulthan previously. However, all of the informa- and does not indicate a fire, but care should betion, cautions and warnings in this manual taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationstill apply and must be followed. The front and choking. Those with a history of a breath-air bags are designed to inflate in higher ing condition should get fresh air promptly.1-16 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING operation of the supplemental front placed immediately by a qualified re- air bag system. pair facility. A cracked windshield¼ Do not place any objects on the steer- could affect inflation of the supple- ¼ Tampering with the supplemental ing wheel pad or on the instrument mental air bag system. front air bag system may result in panel. Also, do not place any objects serious personal injury. Tampering * The SRS wiring harnesses are cov- between any occupant and the steer- includes changes to the steering ered with yellow insulation either just ing wheel or instrument panel. Such wheel and the instrument panel as- before the harness connectors or objects may become dangerous pro- sembly by placing material over the over the complete harness for easy jectiles and may cause injury if the steering wheel pad and above the identification. supplemental air bag inflates. instrument panel, or by installing ad-¼ Right after inflation, several air bag ditional trim material around the air When selling your vehicle, we request that you system components will be hot. Do bag system. inform the buyer about the supplemental air not touch them; you may severely ¼ Work around and on the supplemen- bag system and guide the buyer to the appro- burn yourself. tal front air bag system should be priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.¼ No unauthorized changes should be done by an authorized NISSAN made to any components or wiring of dealer. Installation of electrical equip- the supplemental air bag system. ment should also be done by an au- This is to prevent accidental inflation thorized NISSAN dealer. The yellow of the supplemental front air bags or Supplemental Restraint System damage to the supplemental air bag (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not system. be modified or disconnected. Unau- thorized electrical test equipment and¼ Do not make unauthorized changes probing devices should not be used to your vehicle’s electrical system, on the air bag system. suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper ¼ A cracked windshield should be re- Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • When the supplemental side air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by WARNING release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire, but care should be ¼ Do not place any objects near the taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- seatback of the front seats. Also, do ing condition should get fresh air promptly. not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door fin- Supplemental side air bags along with the use isher and the front seat. Such objects of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force may become dangerous projectiles on the head and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious and cause injury if the supplemental injuries. However, an inflating side air bag may side air bag inflates. cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air ¼ Right after inflation, several side air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. bag system components will be hot. SSS0165 The seat belts should be correctly worn and Do not touch them; you may severelySupplemental side air bag system (if the driver and passenger seated upright as far burn yourself.so equipped) as practical away from the supplemental side air bags. Since the side air bags inflate quickly ¼ No unauthorized changes should beThe supplemental side air bags are located in in order to help protect the front occupants, the made to any components or wiring ofthe outside of the seatback of the front seats. force of the side air bag inflating can increase the supplemental side air bag sys-The supplemental side air bag (on the driver or the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to tem. This is to prevent accidentalfront passenger seat) is designed to inflate in or is against the side air bag module during inflation of the side air bags or dam-higher severity side collisions, although it may inflation. The side air bags will deflate quickly age to the side air bag system.inflate if the forces in another type of collision after the collision is over.are similar to those of a higher severity side ¼ Do not make unauthorized changes After turning the ignition key to the ONimpact. It is designed to inflate on the side to your vehicle’s electrical system, position, the supplemental air bag warningwhere the vehicle is impacted. It may not light illuminates. The supplemental air bag suspension system or side panel.inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle dam- warning light will turn off after about 7 This could affect proper operation ofage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of seconds if the system is operational. the side air bag system.proper supplemental side air bag operation.1-18 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • When selling your vehicle, we request that you¼ Tampering with the supplemental inform the buyer about the supplemental side operation. Tampering with the pre- side air bag system may result in air bag system and guide the buyer to the tensioner seat belt system may result serious personal injury. Tampering appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. in serious personal injury. includes changes to the front seats Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For ¼ Work around and on the pretensioner assembly by placing material near front seats) system should be done by an autho- the seatback of the front seat, or by rized NISSAN dealer. Installation of installing additional trim material, electrical equipment should also be such as seat covers, around the side WARNING done by an authorized NISSAN air bag system. dealer. Unauthorized electrical test¼ Work around and on the supplemen- ¼ The pre-tensioner seat belts cannot equipment and probing devices tal side air bag system should be be reused after activation. They must should not be used on the pre- done by an authorized NISSAN be replaced together with the retrac- tensioner seat belt system. dealer. Installation of electrical equip- tor as a unit. ¼ If you need to dispose of the pre- ment should also be done by an au- ¼ If the vehicle becomes involved in a tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con- thorized NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir- frontal collision but the pre-tensioner tact an authorized NISSAN dealer. ing harnesses* should not be is not activated, be sure to have the Correct pre-tensioner disposal proce- modified or disconnected. Unautho- pre-tensioner system checked and, if dures are set forth in the appropriate rized electrical test equipment and necessary, replaced by your NISSAN NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect probing devices should not be used dealer. disposal procedures could cause on the side air bag system. ¼ No unauthorized changes should be personal injury.* The SRS wiring harnesses are cov- made to any components or wiring of ered with yellow insulation either just the pre-tensioner seat belt system. The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system before the harness connectors or This is to prevent accidental activa- activates in conjunction with the supplemental over the complete harness for easy tion of the pre-tensioner seat belts or front air bags. Working with the seat belt identification. damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-19 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • types of collisions, thereby restraining seatoccupants.The pre-tensioner is encased with the seatbelt’s retractor. These seat belts are used thesame as conventional seat belts.When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may beheard. The smoke is not harmful, but careshould be taken not to inhale it as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a history ofbreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner SSS0139Asystem, the supplemental air bag warning light will not come on, will flash intermittently SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGor will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the WARNING LABELSON or START position. In this case, the pre- Warning labels about the supplemental air bagtensioner seat belt may not function properly. system and supplemental side air bag systemThe system should be inspected by an autho- are placed in the vehicle.rized NISSAN dealer.When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seatbelt system and guide the buyer to the appro-priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.1-20 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational. accident. If any of the following conditions occurs, the supplemental front air bag and supplemental Repair and replacement procedure side air bag systems and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing: The supplemental front air bags and supple- mental side air bags are designed to inflate on ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless remains on after approximately 7 seconds. they are damaged, the supplemental air bag ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light warning light will remain illuminated after infla- flashes intermittently. tion has occurred. Repair and replacement of the supplemental systems should be done ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light only by authorized NISSAN dealers. does not come at all. SPA1097 When maintenance work is required on the Under these conditions, the supplemental front vehicle, the supplemental front air bags,SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG air bags, supplemental side air bags and/or supplemental side air bags, pre-tensioner seatWARNING LIGHT pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate prop- belts and related parts should be pointed out to erly. It must be checked and repaired. Take the person conducting the maintenance. TheThe supplemental air bag warning light, dis- ignition key should always be in the LOCK your vehicle to the nearest authorized NISSANplaying in the instrument panel, monitors position when working under the hood or in-the circuits of the supplemental front air bag dealer. side the vehicle.and supplemental side air bag systems, andpre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits monitored WARNINGby the air bag warning light are the diagnosis WARNINGsensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag If the supplemental air bag warning lightmodules, side air bag modules, pre-tensioner ¼ Once the supplemental front air bagsseat belt and all related wiring. is on, it could mean that the supplemen- or supplemental side air bag has in- tal front air bag system or supplementalAfter turning the ignition key to the ON posi- flated, the air bag module will not side air bag system will not operate in antion, the air bag warning light illuminates. The function again and must be replaced,supplemental air bag warning light will turn off Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-21 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SEAT BELTS additionally, if any of the supplemen- tal air bags inflate, the pre-tensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag module should be replaced by an authorized NISSAN dealer. The air bag module cannot be repaired. ¼ The supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag systems and pre-tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by an authorized NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the SSS0136 vehicle or replaced if the supplemen- tal air bag has inflated. ¼ If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or pre- tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle, contact an authorized NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal pro- cedures are set forth in the appropri- ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. SSS01341-22 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT accident. Serious injury or death can USAGE occur if the seat belt is not worn Your chances of being injured or killed in an properly. accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced if you are wearing your seat ¼ Always route the shoulder belt over belt and it is properly adjusted. NISSAN your shoulder and across your chest. strongly encourages you and all of your pas- Never run the belt behind your back, sengers to buckle up every time you drive, under your arm or across your neck. even if your seating position includes a supple- The belt should be away from your mental air bag. face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a ¼ Position the lap belt as low and snugSSS0016 vehicle is being driven. as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could WARNING increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. ¼ Every person who drives or rides in ¼ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- this vehicle should use a seat belt at curely fastened to the proper buckle. all times. Children should be properly restrained and, if appropriate, in a ¼ Do not wear the belt inside out or child restraint. twisted. Doing so may reduce its ef- fectiveness. ¼ The belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may ¼ Do not allow more than one person to reduce the effectiveness of the entire use the same belt. restraint systems and increase the ¼ Never carry more people in the ve- chance or severity of injury in anSSS0014 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-23 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • hicle than there are seat belts. and continue to operate properly. WARNING Seat belt assemblies not in use dur- ¼ If the seat belt warning light glows ing a collision should also be in- Infants and children need special pro- continuously while the ignition is spected and replaced if either dam- tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not turned ON with all doors closed and age or improper operation is noted. fit them properly. The shoulder belt may all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the ¼ All child restraints and attaching come too close to the face or neck. The system checked by your NISSAN hardware should be inspected after lap belt may not fit over their small hip dealer. any collision. Always follow the re- bones. In an accident, an improperly straint manufacturer’s inspection in- fitting seat belt could cause serious or ¼ Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has structions and replacement recom- fatal injury. Always use appropriate child activated, it cannot be reused and mendations. The child restraints restraints. must be replaced together with the should be replaced if they are dam- retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. aged. All US states and provinces of Canada require ¼ Removal and installation of the pre- the use of approved child restraints for infants tensioner seat belt system compo- CHILD SAFETY and small children. See “Child restraints” later nents should be done by an autho- in this section. rized NISSAN dealer. Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition, there are many types of child ¼ All seat belt assemblies including re- restraints available for larger children which tractors and attaching hardware The proper restraint depends on the child’s should be used for maximum protection. should be inspected after any colli- size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and sion by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear NISSAN recommends that all preteens and recommends that all seat belt assem- facing child restraints. Front facing child re- children be restrained in the rear seat if straints are available for children who outgrow possible. According to accident statistics, blies in use during a collision be rear facing child restraints. children are safer when properly restrained replaced unless the collision was mi- in the rear seat than in the front seat. nor and the belts show no damage This is especially important because your vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint Sys-1-24 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • tem (Air Bag System) for the front passen- and neck, use the shoulder belt without theger. See “Supplemental Restraint System” booster seat.earlier in this section for precaution.Infants and small children WARNINGNISSAN recommends that infants and small Never let a child stand or kneel on anychildren be placed in child restraints that com- seat and do not allow a child in the cargoply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- areas while the vehicle is moving. Thedards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- child could be seriously injured or killeddards. You should choose a child restraint that in an accident or sudden stop.fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.Larger children PREGNANT WOMEN SSS0018Children who are too large for child restraints NISSAN recommends that pregnant womenshould be seated and restrained by the seat use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTbelts which are provided. snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. WITH RETRACTORIf the child’s seating position has a shoulder Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder andbelt that fits close to the face or neck, the use across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder WARNINGof a booster seat (commercially available) may belt over your abdominal area. Contact yourhelp overcome this. The booster seat should doctor for specific recommendations.raise the child so that the shoulder belt is ¼ Every person who drives or rides inproperly positioned across the top, middle INJURED PERSONS this vehicle should use a seat belt atportion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low all times. NISSAN recommends that injured personson the hips. The booster seat should fit the ¼ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when use seat belts, depending on the injury. Checkvehicle seat and have a label certifying that it the seatback is reclined. This can be with your doctor for specific recommendations.complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety dangerous. The shoulder belt will notStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. Once the child has grown so the be against your body. In an accidentshoulder belt is no longer on or near the face Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0020 SSS0102 SSS0061 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor The front seat passenger side seat belt and you could be thrown into it and re- and insert the tongue into the buckle until it rear three-point seat belts have a cinching ceive neck or other serious injuries. snaps. mechanism for child restraint installation. It is You could also slide under the lap referred to as the automatic locking mode. The retractor is designed to lock during a belt and receive serious internal inju- sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling When the cinching mechanism is activated the ries. motion will permit the belt to move, and seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the ¼ For most effective protection when allow you some freedom of movement in seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle the vehicle is in motion, the seat the seat. and fully retracted. For additional information, see “Child Restraints for Infants and Small should be upright. Always sit well 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug Children” later in this section. back in the seat and adjust the seat on the hips as shown. belt properly. The automatic locking mode should be 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the used only for child restraint installation.Fastening the seat belts retractor to take up extra slack. During normal seat belt use by a passen-1. Adjust the seat. ger, the locking mode should not be acti-1-26 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- forward. The retractor should lock and re-fortable seat belt tension. strict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check WARNING or if you have any question about belt opera- tion, see your NISSAN dealer. When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured in the right position, passengers may be injured in an acci- dent or sudden stop. SSS0021 Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract. Checking seat belt operation Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock belt movement by two separate methods: ¼ When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. ¼ When the vehicle slows down rapidly. You can check the operation as follows: ¼ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-27 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING ¼ After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in posi- tion. ¼ The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire PD1328M restraint system and increase the SPA0531 chance or severity of injury in anShoulder belt height adjustment (For accident. Seat belt hookfront seats) When the rear seat belt is not in use, hook it atThe shoulder belt anchor height should be the belt hook.adjusted to the position best suited for you(see “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” earlierin this section). To adjust, push the releasebuttons, then move the shoulder belt anchor tothe desired position so that the belt passesover the shoulder. Release the adjustmentbuttons to lock the shoulder belt anchor intoposition.1-28 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPA0110 SSS0103 SSS0024TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT Fastening the seat belts 2. To lengthen, hold the tongue at a rightWITHOUT RETRACTOR (Center of angle to the belt and pull on the belt. 1. Insert the tongue into the buckle markedrear seat) CENTER until it snaps. To shorten, pull the free end of the belt away from the tongue, then pull the belt clipSelecting correct set of seat belts to take up the slack.The center seat belt buckle and tongue are 3. Position the lap belt low and snug on theidentified by the CENTER mark. The center hips as shown.seat belt tongue can be fastened only into thecenter seat belt buckle. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-29 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or right passenger seating position. See your NISSAN dealer for assistance if the ex- tender is required. WARNING SSS0025 SSS0026 ¼ Only NISSAN belt extenders, made by Unfastening the seat belts the same company which made the To unfasten the belt, press the button on the original equipment belts, should be buckle. used with NISSAN belts. ¼ Persons who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. ¼ Never use seat belt extenders to in- stall child restraints. If the child re- straint is not secured properly, the SSS00601-30 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CHILD RESTRAINTS PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD child could be seriously injured in a ¼ NISSAN recommends that the child RESTRAINTS collision or a sudden stop. restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, chil- WARNING dren are safer when properly re-SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE strained in the rear seat than in the¼ To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a ¼ Infants and small children should al- front seat. mild soap solution or any solution recom- ways be placed in an appropriate mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. ¼ An improperly installed child re- child restraint while riding in the ve- Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth straint could lead to serious injury or hicle. Failure to use a child restraint and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow death in an accident. can result in serious injury or death. the seat belts to retract until they are com- pletely dry. ¼ Infants and small children should In general, child restraints are designed to be never be carried on your lap. It is not¼ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of installed with a lap belt or the lap portion of a the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may possible for even the strongest adult three point type seat belt. Child restraints for retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide to resist the forces of a severe acci- infants and children of various sizes are of- with a clean, dry cloth. dent. The child could be crushed be- fered by several manufacturers. When select- tween the adult and parts of the ve- ing any child restraint, keep the following¼ Periodically check to see that the seat hicle. Also, do not put the same seat points in mind: belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires belt around both your child and your- self. ¼ Choose only a restraint with a label certify- and anchors work properly. If loose parts, ing that it complies with Federal Motor deterioration, cuts or other damage on the ¼ Never install a rear facing child re- Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian webbing is found, the entire belt assembly straint in the front seat. An inflating Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. should be replaced. supplemental front air bag could se- ¼ Check the child restraint in your vehicle to riously injure or kill your child. A rear be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s facing child restraint must only be seat and seat belt system. Choose a child used in the rear seat. restraint that meets the guidelines of the Society of Automotive Engineers recom- Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-31 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • mended practice J1819 for child restraint installation. some types of child restraints in your must install a front facing child re- vehicle. straint in the front seat, see later in¼ If the child restraint is compatible with your “Child restraints” for installation on vehicle, place your child in the child re- ¼ If the child restraint is not anchored front passenger seat. straint and check the various adjustments properly, the risk of a child being to be sure the child restraint is compatible injured in a collision or a sudden stop ¼ When your child restraint is not in with your child. Always follow all recom- greatly increases. use, store it in the trunk or keep it mended procedures. secured with a seat belt to prevent it ¼ Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-All US states and Canadian provinces re- from being thrown around in case of tioned to fit the child restraint, but asquire that infants and small children be a sudden stop or accident. upright as possible.restrained in approved child restraints atall times while the vehicle is being oper- ¼ After attaching the child restraint,ated. test it before you place the child in it. CAUTION Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt WARNING holds the restraint in place. If the Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. restraint is not secure, tighten the Check the seating surface and buckles ¼ Improper use of a child restraint can belt as necessary, or put the restraint before placing your child in the child result in increased injuries for both in another seat and test it again. restraint. the infant or child and other occu- pants in the vehicle. ¼ For a front facing child restraint, if the seat position where it is installed has ¼ Follow all of the child restraint manu- a three-point type lap/shoulder belt, facturer’s instructions for installation check to make sure the shoulder belt and use. When purchasing a child does not go in front of the child’s face restraint, be sure to select one which or neck. If it does, put the shoulder will fit your child and vehicle. It may belt behind the child restraint. If you not be possible to properly install1-32 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0104 SSS0029 SSS0105INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a veryCENTER POSITION restraint and insert it into the buckle until tight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap belt you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure adjustment.Front facing to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.When you install a child restraint in a rearcenter seat, follow these steps:1. Position the child restraint on the seat as illustrated. The direction of the child re- straint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc- tions. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-33 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0031 SSS0033 SSS00354. Before placing the child in the child re- Rear facing 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child straint, use force to tilt the child restraint restraint and insert it into the buckle until from side to side, and tug it forward to make When you install a child restraint in a rear you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure sure that it is securely held in place. center seat, follow these steps: to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s 1. Position the child restraint on the seat as instructions for belt routing.5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again, or put the restraint in another seat. illustrated. The direction of the child re- straint depends on the type of the child6. Check to make sure the child restraint is restraint and the size of the child. Always properly secured prior to each use. follow the restraint manufacturer’s instruc- tions.1-34 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0036 SSS0106 SSS00413. Remove all slack in the lap belt for a very 4. Before placing the child in the child re- INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT tight fit by pulling forcefully on the lap belt straint, use force to tilt the child restraint OUTBOARD POSITIONS adjustment. from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. Front facing 5. If it is not secure, try to tighten the belt again, or put the restraint in another seat. WARNING 6. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. ¼ The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retrac- tor which must be used when install- ing a child restraint. ¼ Failure to do so will result in the child Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-35 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be un- secured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.When you install a child restraint in a rearoutboard seat, follow these steps:1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manu- facturer’s instructions. SSS0043 SSS0107 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt restraint and insert it into the buckle until is fully extended. At this time, the belt you hear and feel the latch engage. retractor is in the automatic locking mode Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- (child restraint mode). It reverts back to facturer’s instructions for belt routing. emergency locking mode when the buckle is unlatched and the belt is allowed to fully retract.1-36 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact. SSS0062 SSS01084. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt 5. Before placing the child in the child re- to remove any slack in the belt. straint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-37 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • in a sudden stop or collision. When you install a child restraint in a rear outboard seat, follow these steps: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manu- facturer’s instructions. SSS0044 SSS0046Rear facing 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure WARNING to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. ¼ The three-point belt on your vehicle is equipped with a locking mode retrac- tor which must be used when install- ing a child restraint. ¼ Failure to do so will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be un- secured and cause injury to the child1-38 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0045A SSS0109 SSS01103. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt 4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt 5. Before placing the child in the child re- is fully extended. At this time, the belt to remove any slack in the belt. straint, use force to tilt the child restraint retractor is in the automatic locking mode from side to side, and tug it forward to make (child restraint mode). It reverts back to sure that it is securely held in place. emergency locking mode when the belt is fully retracted. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is allowed to wind back into the Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-39 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • retractor, the automatic locking mode (child If your child restraint has a top tether strap, itrestraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only must be secured to the provided anchor point.locks during a sudden stop or impact. Secure the child restraint with the center lap belt or the lap portion of an outboard three- point belt and latch the tether strap hook onto the anchor bracket. Secure the tether strap to the anchor bracket which provides the straightest installation of the tether strap. SSS0065 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT WARNING The child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.1-40 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • compartment through the holes. See “Precautions when starting and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas. SSS0174BAnchor point locationsAnchor points are located under the carpet ofthe rear luggage area floor.When installing a top strap child restrainton the rear seat for the first time, consultyour NISSAN dealer for details. WARNING The anchor bolt should be installed at all times to prevent the possibility of ex- haust fumes entering the passenger Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-41 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • tor which must be used when install- ing a child restraint. ¼ Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode may result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. SSS0129INSTALLATION ON FRONT ¼ NISSAN recommends that child re-PASSENGER SEAT straints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a front WARNING facing child restraint in the front pas- senger seat, move the passenger ¼ Never install a rear facing child re- seat to the rearmost position. straint in the front passenger seat. ¼ A child restraint with a top tether Supplemental front air bags inflate strap should not be used in the front with great force. A rear facing child passenger seat. restraint could be struck by the front air bag in a crash and could seriously ¼ The three-point belt in your vehicle is injure or kill your child. equipped with a locking mode retrac-1-42 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSS0135 SSS0055 SSS0113Front facing 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt restraint and insert it into the buckle until is fully extended. At this time, the beltIf you must install a child restraint in the front you hear and feel the latch engage. retractor is in the automatic locking modeseat, follow these steps: Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- (child restraint mode). It reverts back to1. Position the child restraint on the front facturer’s instructions for belt routing. emergency locking mode when the belt is passenger seat. It should be placed in a fully retracted. front facing direction only. Move the seat to the rear most position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-43 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • seat belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks during a sudden stop or impact. SSS0056 SSS01144. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt 5. Before placing the child in the child re- to remove any slack in the belt. straint, use force to tilt the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. 6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the1-44 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-45 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 2 Instruments and controlsInstrument panel ....................................................... 2-2 Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-22Meters and gauges ................................................... 2-3 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ............................. 2-23 Speedometer and odometer ................................ 2-3 Front fog light switch .......................................... 2-23 Tachometer .......................................................... 2-4 Hazard warning flasher switch ................................ 2-23 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...................... 2-4 Horn......................................................................... 2-24 Fuel gauge ........................................................... 2-5 Heated seats (if so equipped)................................. 2-24Compass and outside temperature display (if so Clock ....................................................................... 2-25equipped) .................................................................. 2-6 Adjusting the time............................................... 2-25 Outside temperature display ................................ 2-6 Power outlet (if so equipped) .................................. 2-25 Compass display .................................................. 2-7 Cigarette lighter and ashtray (if so equipped) ........ 2-26Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders........ 2-9 Storage .................................................................... 2-27 Checking bulbs ..................................................... 2-9 Tray .................................................................... 2-27 Warning lights....................................................... 2-9 Coin box (if so equipped) ................................... 2-27 Indicator lights .................................................... 2-13 Glasses case ...................................................... 2-28 Audible reminders .............................................. 2-15 Cup holders ........................................................ 2-28Security systems ..................................................... 2-15 Glove box ........................................................... 2-29 Vehicle security system...................................... 2-15 Console box ....................................................... 2-30 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system .................... 2-17 Luggage hooks ................................................... 2-32Windshield wiper and washer switch ...................... 2-18 Cargo net............................................................ 2-33Rear window wiper and washer switch................... 2-18 Tonneau cover (if so equipped) ......................... 2-33Glass hatch and outside mirror (if so equipped) Luggage rack (if so equipped) ........................... 2-34defogger switch ...................................................... 2-19 Windows .................................................................. 2-35Headlight and turn signal switch ............................. 2-19 Power windows .................................................. 2-35 Headlight switch ................................................. 2-20 Sunroof (if so equipped) ......................................... 2-36 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Electric sunroof................................................... 2-36 Operating the integrated HomeLink UniversalInterior lights (if so equipped) ................................. 2-38 Transceiver ......................................................... 2-42Personal lights......................................................... 2-39 Programming trouble-diagnosis.......................... 2-42Vanity mirror light (if so equipped).......................... 2-40 Clearing the programmed information................ 2-42HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so Rolling code programming ................................. 2-42equipped) ................................................................ 2-40 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button...... 2-43 Programming HomeLink ................................... 2-41 If your vehicle is stolen ...................................... 2-43 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers ........................................................... 2-41 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • INSTRUMENT PANEL Cruise control switch (P.5-17) Windshield Meters/gauges (P.2-3) and rear window wiper/ washer switch Driver’s supplemental air bag (P.1-10) (P.2-18) Compass/outside air temperature display (P.2-6) Headlight/dimmer/turn signal switch (P.2-19) Hazard warning Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-10) Front fog light switch (P.2-23) flasher switch (P.2-23) Center ventilator (P.4-2) Side ventilator (P.4-2) Clock (P.2-25) Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-2) Security indicator light (P.2-15)Instrument brightness control(P.2-21) Fuse box cover (P.8-28)/ Tilting steering wheel Tray (P.2-27) adjust lever (P.3-14) Glove box (P.2-29) Outside mirror remote control Glass hatch/ Power outlet (P.2-25) or Cigarette lighter (P.2-26) (P.3-15) Ignition switch/steering outside mirror Heated seat switch (P.2-24) (4WD shift switch equipped models) Hood release handle (P.3-9) lock (P.5-6) defogger switch Radio (P.4-11)/CD player (P.4-13) or Navigation system* Steering switch for audio control (P.2-19) Heated seat switch (P.2-24) (P.4-30) or 4WD shift switch (P.5-24) See the page indicated in parentheses for operating details. *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. SIC14382-2 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • METERS AND GAUGES SIC1440 SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Odometer/twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed SIC1587 when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. Instruments and controls 2-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Changing the display:Push the reset knob to change the display asfollows:TRIP A , TRIP B , TRIP AResetting the trip odometer:Push the reset knob for more than 1 second toreset the trip odometer to zero. SIC1588 SIC0173 TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT The tachometer indicates engine speed in TEMPERATURE GAUGE revolutions per minute (r/min). The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem- perature. CAUTION The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving condi- When engine speed approaches the red tions. zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause CAUTION serious engine damage. If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop2-4 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • The indicates that the fuel filler lid isthe vehicle as soon as safely possible. If located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.the engine is overheated, continued op-eration of the vehicle may seriously CAUTIONdamage the engine. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “6. In case of emer- ¼ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, thegency” section for immediate action re- malfunction indicator lampquired. (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the lamp should turn off. If the lamp remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized NISSAN dealer. SIC1781 ¼ For additional information, see the FUEL GAUGE “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” The gauge indicates the APPROXIMATE fuel later in this section. level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill. The gauge needle is designed to move to the E (Empty) position when the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters Empty. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E. Instruments and controls 2-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • COMPASS AND OUTSIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY(if so equipped) ¼ When the outside temperature is be- tween 130°F (55°C) and 158°F (70°C), the display shows 130°F (55°C). ¼ When the outside temperature is lower than −20°F (−30°C) or higher than 158°F (70°C), the display shows only - - - though it is operating. This is not a malfunction. ¼ The outside temperature sensor is lo- cated in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind direction and other driving condi- tions. The display may differ from the SIC0590 SIC0610 actual outside temperature or the tem- perature displayed on various signs orThis unit is a display unit with the following OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE billboards.functions: DISPLAY¼ Function to measure terrestrial magnetism Push the switch when the ignition key is in the CAUTION and indicate heading direction of vehicle ACC or ON position. The outside temperature¼ Function to indicate outside air temperature will be displayed in °F. Use the ICE indication for reference ¼ Selecting the indication range only. Confirm the traffic information and¼ Function to indicate caution for frozen road surfaces road conditions to drive safely. Push the switch to change from °F to °C. ¼ If the outside temperature drops below the freezing point, the display indicates ICE.2-6 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • COMPASS DISPLAY Push the switch when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. The direction will be displayed. Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass read- ings. Follow these instructions to set the vari- ance for your particular location if this hap- pens: 1. Establish your location on the zone map. Record your zone number. 2. Push the ON/OFF switch in for five seconds until the current zone entry number is dis- played. 3. Press the ON/OFF switch repeatedly until the new zone entry number is displayed. Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop pressing the ON/OFF switch and the display will show compass direction within a few seconds.SIC0611 Instruments and controls 2-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ¼ If a magnet is located near the compass or the vehicle is driven where the terres- CAUTION trial magnetism is disturbed, the com- pass display may not indicate the cor- In places where the earth’s magnetism rect direction. is disturbed, the initial correction proce-¼ In places where the terrestrial magne- dure may start automatically. tism is disturbed, the correction of the direction starts automatically, extin- guishing the direction bar. If turn is made one or two times, the correction is complete and the direction bar comes back on.Correction functions of the compassdisplayThe compass display is equipped with auto-matic correction function. If the direction is notshown correctly, carry out manual correctionprocedure set out below.Manual correction procedure1. Push the switch for about 10 seconds. The direction bar starts blinking.2. Drive the vehicle slowly in an open and safe area. The initial correction is completed while turning one or two turns.2-8 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTSAND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti-lock brake warning light 4WD warning light 4WD indicator light (Except for Canada) Anti-lock brake warning light Low fuel warning light 4WD shift indicator light (For Canada) Automatic transmission oil temperature Low washer fluid warning light High beam indicator light warning light (Canada only) Automatic transmission park warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) Overdrive off indicator light or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light (Automatic transmission models only) Charge warning light Tire carrier open warning light Transfer 4LO position indicator light Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator lightCHECKING BULBS trical system. Have the system repaired anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary promptly. brakes will continue to operate normally.Apply the parking brake and turn the ignitionkey to ON without starting the engine. The WARNING LIGHTS If the light comes on while you are driving,following lights will come on: contact your NISSAN dealer for repair. , , or , , or Anti-lock brake warning light Automatic transmission oil temperature warning lightThe following lights come on briefly and then If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake ( model)go off: , or , , , system is not functioning properly. Have the This light comes on when the automatic trans- system checked by your NISSAN dealer. mission oil temperature is too high. If the lightIf any light fails to come on, it may indicate aburned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec- If an abnormality occurs in the system, the comes on while driving, reduce the vehicle Instruments and controls 2-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • speed as soon as safely possible until the light (Before shifting the transfer shift lever into theturns off. 4L could result in the vehicle moving 4L position, move the automatic transmission unexpectedly, resulting in serious selector lever into the N position once, shift the personal injury or property damage. selector lever into P again and) make sure the CAUTION All mode 4WD models: ATP warning light is OFF. Continued vehicle operation when the All-mode 4WD models ¼ When parking, always make sure that A/T oil temperature warning light is on 4WD shift indicator light illuminates The warning light may come on when the may damage the automatic trans- and the parking brake is set. Failure ignition switch is ON and the automatic trans- mission. to engage the 4WD shift switch in 2H, mission lever is shifted to the P position while AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the shifting the transfer case between 4H and vehicle moving unexpectedly, result- 4LO. Automatic transmission park ing in serious personal injury or prop- warning light ( model) Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO, erty damage. 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warning light when the warning light comes on. WARNING (Before shifting the 4WD shift switch into the This light indicates that the automatic trans- mission parking function is not engaged. If the 4LO position or out of 4LO into the 4H position, ¼ If the ATP light is ON, this indicates move the automatic transmission selector le- transfer control is not secured in any drive that the automatic transmission P ver into the N position). Shift the selector lever position while the automatic transmission se- (Park) position will not function and into the P position and make sure that the lector lever is in the P (Park) position, the the transfer lever or the transfer case 4WD shift indicator light is ON and the ATP transmission will disengage and the wheel will is in neutral. not lock. warning light is OFF. Part time 4WD models: Part time 4WD models or Brake warning light ¼ When parking, always make sure that Shift the transfer shift lever into the 2H, 4H or This light functions for both the parking brake the transfer lever is in H or 4L and the 4L position again to turn off the ATP warning and the foot brake systems. parking brake is set. Failure to en- light when the automatic transmission selector gage the transfer control lever in H or lever is in the P position and the ATP warning light is ON.2-10 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Parking brake indicator: Door open warning light ¼ Pressing the brake pedal with theThe light comes on when the parking brake is engine stopped and/or low brake fluid This light comes on when any of the doorsapplied. and/or rear window are not closed securely level may increase your stopping dis-Low brake fluid warning light: while the ignition key is ON. tance and braking will require greaterWhen the ignition key is in the ON position, the pedal effort as well as greater pedal Engine oil pressure warninglight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light travel. lightcomes on while the engine is running, stop the ¼ If the brake fluid level is below the This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifvehicle and perform the following: MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, the light flickers or comes on during normal1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid do not drive until the brake system driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the as necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid” has been checked at a NISSAN engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” dealer. or other authorized repair shop. section. The oil pressure warning light is not de-2. If the brake fluid level is correct: signed to indicate a low oil level. Use the Charge warning light dipstick to check the oil level. See “EngineHave the warning system checked by a If the light comes on while the engine is oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”NISSAN dealer. running, it may indicate the charging system is section. not functioning properly. Turn the engine off WARNING and check the alternator belt. If the belt is CAUTION loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, see your NISSAN dealer immediately. ¼ Your brake system may not be work- Running the engine with the oil pressure ing properly if the warning light is on. warning light on could cause serious Driving could be dangerous. If you CAUTION damage to the engine almost immedi- judge it to be safe, drive carefully to ately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is the nearest service station for re- Do not continue driving if the belt is safe to do so. pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle loose, broken or missing. towed. Instruments and controls 2-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 4WD warning light ( belts. The light illuminates whenever the igni- and shift the 4WD shift switch to tion key is turned to ON, and will remain model) 2WD. illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fas-The four wheel drive warning light comes on tened. At the same time, the chime will sound If the warning light is still on after thewhen the key switch is turned to ON. It turns off for about six seconds unless the driver’s seatsoon after the engine is started. above operation, have your vehicle belt is securely fastened. checked by an authorized NISSANIf the engine or vehicle is not functioning dealer as soon as possible. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Seats, restraints andproperly, the warning light will either remain supplemental air bag systems” section for pre-illuminated or blink. See “4WD warning light” in cautions on seat belt usage.the “5. Starting and driving” section. Low fuel warning light Supplemental air bag warning This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is light CAUTION getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E. After turning the ignition key to the ON posi- ¼ If the warning light comes on or tion, the supplemental air bag light will illumi- blinks during operation, have your There will be a small reserve of fuel remain- nate. The supplemental air bag warning light ing in the tank when the fuel gauge needle vehicle checked by an authorized will turn off after about 7 seconds if the supple- reaches E. NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. mental front air bag and supplemental side air Low washer fluid warning bag systems and pre-tensioner seat belt are ¼ Do not drive on dry hard surface operational. roads in the 4H or 4LO position. If the light (Canada only) 4WD warning light turns on when you If any of the following conditions occur, the This light comes on when the washer fluid in are driving on dry hard surface roads supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat the washer tank is at a low level. Add washer belt need servicing and your vehicle must be ¼ in the AUTO or 4H position, shift fluid as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” taken to your nearest authorized NISSAN in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- dealer. the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. tion. ¼ in the 4LO position, stop the ve- ¼ The supplemental air bag warning light Seat belt warning light and remains on after approximately 7 seconds. hicle, move the automatic trans- chime mission lever to the N position, ¼ The supplemental air bag light flashes in- The light and chime remind you to fasten seat termittently.2-12 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ¼ The supplemental air bag light does not INDICATOR LIGHTS The 4WD shift indicator light may blink come on at all. while shifting from one drive mode to the Cruise main switch indicator other.Unless checked and repaired, the supplemen-tal restraint system and/or the pre-tensioner light (if so equipped) High beam indicator lightseat belt may not function properly. For addi- The light comes on when the main switch istional information, see “Supplemental restraint (Blue) turned on.system” in the “1. Seats, restraints and supple- This light comes on when the headlight highmental air bag systems” section. Cruise set switch indicator beam is on, and goes out when the low beams light (if so equipped) are selected. WARNING The light comes on while the vehicle speed is Malfunction indicator lamp controlled by the cruise control system. If the (MIL) If the supplemental air bag warning light light blinks while the engine is running, it may is on, it could mean that the supplemen- If the Malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicate the cruise control system is not func- steady or blinks while the engine is running, it tal front air bag system, supplemental tioning properly. Have the system checked by may indicate a potential emission control mal- side air bag system (if so equipped) your NISSAN dealer. function. and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate in an accident. 4WD indicator light The Malfunction indicator lamp may also come ( model) on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Tire carrier open warning light This light comes on when the transfer shift Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is control lever is in the 4H or 4L position. installed and closed tightly, and that the ve- (if so equipped) hicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuelThis light comes on when the tire carrier is not 4WD shift indicator light in the fuel tank.closed securely while the ignition key is ON. ( model) After a few driving trips, the lamp should The light should turn off within 1 second after turn off if no other potential emission control turning the ignition switch to ON. system malfunction exists. Operation While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator light will illuminate the position se- The Malfunction indicator lamp will come on in lected by the 4WD shift switch. one of two ways: Instruments and controls 2-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ¼ Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An event of damage to the electrical circuits. If this emission control system malfunction has CAUTION occurs, the gears automatically engage and been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If lock into 3rd gear. the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten Continued vehicle operation without See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Starting or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after having the emission control system and driving” section for failsafe before vis- a few driving trips. If the lamp does checked and repaired as necessary iting your NISSAN dealer. not turn off after a few driving trips, have the could lead to poor driveability, reduced vehicle inspected by an authorized NISSAN fuel economy, and possible damage to Transfer 4LO position dealer. You do not need to have your the emission control system. indicator light ( model) vehicle towed to the dealer. The light should turn off within 1 second after¼ Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An Overdrive off indicator light turning the ignition switch to ON. engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. (Automatic transmission This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch To reduce or avoid emission control system models only) is set in the 4LO position with ignition key in damage: the ON position. This light comes on during driving when the * do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 overdrive switch is pressed to prevent over- If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO km/h). drive operation. position and the light blinks, stop the vehicle, * avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. drive slowly forward and the light will turn on. The O/D OFF indicator light comes on for two * avoid steep uphill grades. seconds each time the ignition key is turned When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the * if possible, reduce the amount of cargo ON. This shows the light is functioning prop- vehicle, move the automatic transmission se- being hauled or towed. erly. lector lever to the N position, and press theThe malfunction indicator lamp may stop blink- 4WD shift switch and move it in 4LO or 4H. If the O/D OFF indicator light blinks foring and come on steady. approximately 8 seconds after coming on for The transfer case may be damaged if you shiftHave the vehicle inspected by an authorized 2 seconds, have your NISSAN dealer check the switch while driving.NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your the transmission and repair it if necessary. You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchvehicle towed to the dealer. The automatic transmission is equipped with between 4H and 4LO unless you have first an electronic Fail-Safe mode. This system stopped the vehicle and moved the automatic allows the vehicle to be driven even in the transmission shift lever to neutral. Make sure2-14 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SECURITY SYSTEMSthe transfer 4LO position indicator light turns is moving, whether or not the brake pedal ison when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. depressed.The indicator light may blink while shiftingfrom one drive mode to the other. Turn signal/hazard indicator lightsThe light flashes when the turn signal switchlever or hazard switch is turned on.AUDIBLE REMINDERSKey reminder chime IC0005The chime will sound when the driver side dooris opened if the key is left in the ignition switch. Your vehicle may have two types of securityTake the ignition key when you leave the system, as follows:vehicle. ¼ Vehicle security systemLight reminder chime ¼ Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer SystemThe chime will sound when the front door is The security condition will be shown by theopened with the headlight switch on unless the security indicator light.ignition key is in the ignition switch. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMBrake pad wear warning The vehicle security system provides visualThe disc brake pads have audible wear warn- and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicleings. When a brake pad requires replacement, are disturbed.it will make a high pitched scraping sound.Have the brakes checked as soon as possibleif the warning sound is heard when the vehicle Instruments and controls 2-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 3. Close and lock all doors, hood, back door to turn the system off. and glass hatch. All doors can be locked either with the keyfob, a key, the door lock Vehicle security system operation knob or the lock-unlock switch. See “Doors” The vehicle security system will give the fol- in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust- lowing alarm: ments” section for locking all doors simul- taneously. ¼ The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. 4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light glows for ¼ The alarm automatically turns off after 1 about 30 seconds and then begins to flash. minute, however, the alarm will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked The alarm is activated by: by the key or keyfob, or the ignition key is ¼ Unlocking the door, back door or back door SIC1442 turned to ACC or ON, the system will not glass hatch without using the key or keyfob. activate. (Even if the door is opened by releasing theSecurity indicator light ¼ If the key is turned slowly toward the door inside lock knob, the alarm is acti-This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is front of the vehicle when locking the vated.)in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This door, the system may not activate. If the ¼ Opening the hood. (Even if the hood isfunction indicates the security systems key is returned beyond the vertical po- opened by the hood release handle, theequipped on the vehicle are operational. sition toward the rear of the vehicle to alarm is activated.) remove the key, the system may beHow to activate the vehicle security deactivated. When the indicator light ¼ Opening the back door glass hatch.system fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the ¼ Connecting the battery connector after it door once and lock it again. has been disconnected from the battery for1. Close all windows. ¼ Even when the driver and/or passengers more than 1 second.The system can be activated even if the are in the vehicle, the system will acti- How to stop alarmwindows are open. vate with all doors, hood, back door and2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. back door glass hatch locked and igni- The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door, tion key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC the back door or the back door glass hatch2-16 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • with the key or keyfob. The alarm will not stop 3. Repeat step 1 and 2. Security indicator lightif the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device This light blinks whenever the ignition switch isThe alarm may be activated when the glass (which may have caused the interference) in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. Thishatch is opened quickly with a key after the separate from the registered Nissan Ve- function indicates the security systemsalarm has been set. hicle Immobilizer System key. equipped on the vehicle are operational.If the system does not operate as de- If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN If the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System isscribed above, have it checked by your recommends placing the registered Nissan malfunctioning, this light will remain on whileNISSAN dealer. Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate the ignition key is in the ON position. key ring to avoid interference from other de- If the light still remains on and/or the en-NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER vices. gine will not start, see your NISSAN dealerSYSTEM Statement related to section 15 of FCC for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- vice as soon as possible. Please bring allnot allow the engine to start without the use of tem Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keysthe registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- (CONT ASSY - IMMOBILIZER) that you have when visiting your NISSANtem key. dealer for service. This device complies with part 15 of theIf the engine fails to start using the registered FCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryNissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions;example, when interference is caused by an-other Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, (1) This device may not cause harmfulan automated toll road device or automated interference, and (2) this device must ac-payment device on the key ring), restart the cept any interference received, includingengine using the following procedures: interference that may cause undesired op- eration of the device.1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK TURE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE position, and wait approximately 10 sec- COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO onds. OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT. Instruments and controls 2-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WINDSHIELD WIPER AND REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH WASHER SWITCH CAUTION The following could damage the washer system: ¼ Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds. ¼ Do not operate the washer if the res- ervoir tank is empty. SIC1185 WARNING SIC0511The windshield wiper and washer operates In freezing temperatures the washer so- The rear window wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition key is in the ACC or ON lution may freeze on the windshield and when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition. position. obscure your vision which may lead toPush the lever down to operate the wiper. an accident. Warm the windshield with Turn the switch clockwise to the intermittent, the defroster before you wash the wind- low speed position to operate the wiperIntermittent operation can be adjusted from 4 shield. or washer.to 12 seconds by turning the knob. Turn the switch counterclockwise to thePull the lever toward you to operate the position to operate the washer. Then thewasher. Then the wiper will also operate sev- wiper will also operate several times.eral times.2-18 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • GLASS HATCH AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH SWITCH CAUTION ¼ Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds. ¼ Do not operate the washer if reservoir tank is empty. ¼ Do not operate the washer when the glass hatch is open.¼ The rear window wiper will not operate when the glass hatch is open. SIC1443 The rear window wiper will not operate if the glass hatch is closed with the wiper To defog the glass hatch and the outside door switch on. To operate the window wiper, mirrors, start the engine and push the switch turn the switch to off and then to on. on. (The indicator light will come on.) Push the¼ The glass hatch will not open while the switch again to turn the defogger off. rear window wiper is operating. It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes. If the window clears before this time, WARNING push the switch off manually. In freezing temperatures the washer so- CAUTION lution may freeze on the glass hatch and obscure your vision. Warm the glass When cleaning the inner side of the hatch with the defroster before you glass hatch, be careful not to scratch or wash the glass hatch. damage the glass hatch defogger. SIC1444 Instruments and controls 2-19 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • HEADLIGHT SWITCH ¼ When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights auto-Lighting matically turn off, the lights will turn on when the headlight switch is turned to theTurn the switch to the AUTO position: OFF position and turn to the orWhen the ignition key is in the ON position, the position again.tail light, headlight, instrument light and otherlights turn on automatically, depending on thebrightness of the surroundings. The headlight CAUTIONwill automatically turn off 5 minutes after theignition switch is turned to the OFF position ¼ When you turn on the headlightand the driver’s or front passenger’s door is switch after the lights automaticallyopened. turn off, the lights will not turn offThe headlight will also automatically turn off 45 automatically. Be sure to turn theseconds after a front door is opened and SIC1573 light switch to the OFF position whenclosed. you leave the vehicle for extended Be sure not to put anything on top of the periods of time, otherwise the batteryWhen the light switch is turned to the photo sensor located on the top right-hand side of the instrument panel. The photo will go dead. position, the headlight low or high beamwill turn off. sensor controls the autolamp; if it is cov- ¼ Never leave the light switch on when ered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark the engine is not running for ex-Turn the switch to the position: and the headlights will illuminate. tended periods of time.The side combination, tail, license plate andinstrument lights will come on. Battery saver systemTurn the switch to the position: ¼ When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is inHeadlights will come on and all the other lights the ON position, the lights (including theremain on. front fog light) will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position.2-20 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Headlight beam select To select the high beam, push the lever for- ward. Pull it back to select the low beam. Passing signal Pulling the lever toward you will turn on the passing signal even when the headlight switch is off. Daytime running light system (Canada only) The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started SIC0922 with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switchInstrument brightness control in the off position or in the position. TurnThe instrument brightness control operates the headlight switch to the position forwhen the light switch is in the or full illumination when driving at night. position. If the parking brake is applied before theTurn the control to adjust the brightness of engine is started, the daytime running lights doinstrument panel lights and power window not illuminate. The daytime running lights illu-switch lights. minate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on untilWhen the control is turned upward until a click the ignition switch is turned off.sound is heard, the light intensity will be atmaximum. When the control is turned down-ward until a click sound is heard or felt, thelight will be turned off. SIC1445 Instruments and controls 2-21 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TURN SIGNAL SWITCH WARNING Turn signal When the daytime running light system Move the lever up or down to signal to the is active, tail lights on your vehicle are turning direction. When the turn is completed, not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on the turn signals cancel automatically. your headlights. Failure to do so could Lane change signal cause an accident injuring yourself and others. To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flash- ing. SIC14462-22 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so HAZARD WARNING FLASHERequipped) SWITCH ers while moving on the highway un- less unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your ve- hicle might become a hazard to other traffic. ¼ Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on. IC1292 SIC1447FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency con-To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight ditions. All turn signal lights will flash.switch to the position, then turn theswitch to the position. To turn them off, Some state laws may prohibit the use of theturn the switch to the OFF position. hazard warning flasher switch while driv- ing.The headlights must be on for the fog lights tooperate. WARNING ¼ If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. ¼ Do not use the hazard warning flash- Instruments and controls 2-23 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped) The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. CAUTION ¼ The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. ¼ Do not use the seat heater for ex- SIC0987 SIC1463 tended periods or when no one isTo sound the horn, push the center pad area of The front seat(s) are warmed by built-in heat- using the seat.the steering wheel. ers. The switches located on the instrument ¼ Do not put anything on the seat which panel can be operated independently of each insulates heat, such as a blanket, WARNING other. cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, 1. Start the engine. the seat may become overheated. Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so The battery could run down if the heater is ¼ Do not place anything hard or heavy could affect proper operation of the operated while the engine is not running. on the seat or pierce it with a pin or supplemental front air bag system. Tam- 2. Push the (Low) or (High) po- similar object. This may result in pering with the supplemental front air sition of the switch, as desired, depending damage to the heater. bag system may result in serious per- sonal injury. on the temperature. The indicator light in ¼ Any liquid spilled on the heating seat the switch will illuminate. should be removed immediately with The heater is controlled by a thermostat, a dry cloth. automatically turning the heater on and off.2-24 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CLOCK POWER OUTLET (if so equipped)¼ When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar ma- terials.¼ If any abnormalities are found or the heating seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. SPA1159 The digital clock displays time when the igni- tion key is in ACC or ON. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time. ADJUSTING THE TIME Push the H button to adjust the hour. Push the M button to adjust the minute. SIC1574 Instruments and controls 2-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY (if so equipped)The power outlet is for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. switch of electrical accessory being used or the ACC power of the vehicle. CAUTION ¼ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug ¼ Use caution as the outlet and plug may overheat or the internal tempera- may be hot during or immediately ture fuse may blow. after use. ¼ When not in use, be sure to close the ¼ This power outlet is not designed for cap. Do not allow water to contact the use with a cigarette lighter unit. socket. ¼ Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ¼ Use only one power outlet at a time. ¼ Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged bat- tery.) ¼ Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on. ¼ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure to turn off the power SIC0685B2-26 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • STORAGEThe cigarette lighter element is an accessory.A genuine NISSAN cigarette lighter unit can bepurchased from your local NISSAN dealer.The cigarette lighter operates when the igni-tion switch is in ACC or ON.Push the lighter in all the way. When the lighteris heated, it will spring out.Return the lighter to its original position afteruse. WARNING The cigarette lighter should not be used SIC1449 SIC1735 while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. TRAY COIN BOX (if so equipped) To open the box, lightly push it once and draw WARNING it out. CAUTION Do not use the box as an ashtray. The storage tray should not be used The cigarette lighter socket is a power while driving so full attention may be Do not place valuable items in the box. source for the cigarette lighter element given to vehicle operation. only. The use of the cigarette lighter socket as a power source for any other Do not place valuable items in the tray. accessory is not recommended. Instruments and controls 2-27 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CAUTION ¼ Do not use for anything other than glasses. ¼ Do not leave glasses in the glasses case while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses. SIC0557 SIC0553AGLASSES CASE CUP HOLDERSThe glasses case can be opened by pushingthe button. WARNING WARNING The cup holders should not be used while driving so full attention may be The glasses case should not be used given to vehicle operation. while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. CAUTION ¼ Avoid abrupt starting and braking2-28 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your pas- senger. ¼ Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.The cup holders have an insert that can beremoved for larger cups. SIC1450 SIC1452 To open, pull the cup holder. GLOVE BOX To close, fully push the cup holder. When locking or unlocking the glove box, use the master key. The glove box may be opened by the handle. WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or during a sudden stop. Instruments and controls 2-29 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CONSOLE BOX WARNING ¼ The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ¼ Keep the center console box lid closed while driving to prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop. Do not place valuable items in the center console box. SIC1451 SIC05982-30 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING ¼ Do not drive with the board removed. ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- Keep luggage side console box lids vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not closed securely while driving to prevent place cargo higher than the seat- injury in an accident or sudden stop. backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per-Do not place valuable items in the luggage sonal injury.side console box. ¼ Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. ¼ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ¼ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. SPA0346A CAUTION ¼ Make sure the luggage board closes securely. Instruments and controls 2-31 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • LUGGAGE HOOKSThe luggage hooks can be used to securecargo with ropes or other types of straps. WARNING ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per- sonal injury. SPA0408A SPA0365 ¼ Use the suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo. Side finisher Floor hooks ¼ Never allow anyone to ride in the ¼ When hooking on ropes, do not apply a luggage area. It is extremely danger- load of more than 22 lb (98 N) to a single ous to ride in a cargo area inside of a hook. vehicle. In a collision, people riding in ¼ Do not use the luggage net between the these areas are more likely to be A and B hooks. seriously injured or killed. ¼ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ¼ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.2-32 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPA0396A SPA0419CARGO NET TONNEAU COVER (if so equipped)The cargo net keeps packages in the cargo WARNING The tonneau cover keeps the luggage com-area from moving around while your vehicle is ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- partment contents hidden from the outside.driven. vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not To open the tonneau cover, pull it out andTo install the cargo net, attach the four hooks place cargo higher than the seat- hang both sides on the hooks. To close theto the four retainers. backs. In a sudden stop or collision, tonneau cover, remove it from the hooks and unsecured cargo could cause per-To remove the cargo net, detach the four release it. sonal injury.hooks from the cargo net retainers. ¼ Be sure to secure all four hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in WARNING the net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured. ¼ Never put anything on the tonneau cover, no matter how small. Any ob- Instruments and controls 2-33 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ject on it could cause an injury in an accident or sudden stop. ¼ Do not leave the tonneau cover in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder. ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause per- sonal injury. SIC1541 LUGGAGE RACK (if so equipped) Certification Label (located on the driver’s door pillar). For more information regarding GVWR The cross-bars can be adjusted forward and and GAWR, refer to “9. Technical and con- backward. Place your luggage between the sumer information”. bars (A), adjust the bars (A), and secure the luggage with rope to the bars (A). There are also adjustable loops on the side bars for the CAUTION rope attachment. Use care when placing or removing Always evenly distribute the luggage on the items from the luggage rack. If you can- luggage rack. Do not load more than 100 lb not comfortably lift the items onto the (45 kg). Be careful that your vehicle does not luggage rack from the ground, use a exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating ladder or stool. (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the Safety Compliance2-34 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WINDOWS ingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power window operates when the ignition key is in the ON position. To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows. SIC1464 The power windows are operational for about SIC1471 45 seconds, even after the ignition key isPOWER WINDOWS turned to the OFF position. If the driver’s door The passenger side switch will open or close or the front passenger’s door is opened during only the corresponding window. To open or this period of about 45 seconds, power to the close the window, hold the switch down or up. WARNING windows is canceled. Locking passenger’s windows¼ Make sure that all passengers have When the lock button is pushed in, only the their hands, etc. inside the vehicle driver side window can be opened or closed. before closing the windows. Use the Push it in again to cancel. window lock switch to prevent unex- pected use of the power windows.¼ Do not leave children unattended in- side the vehicle. They could unknow- Instruments and controls 2-35 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SUNROOF (if so equipped) Auto reverse function (For front windows) If the control unit detects something caught in a front window as it moves up, the window will be immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be activated when a front window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may SPA1157 be activated if an impact or load similar to SIC0560A something being caught in the window oc-Automatic operation curs. ELECTRIC SUNROOFTo fully open or close front windows, com- The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionpletely push down or pull up the switch and WARNING key is in the ON position.release it; it need not be held. The window will The electric sunroof is operational for about 45automatically open or close all the way. To There are some small distances imme- seconds, even if the ignition key is turned tostop the window, just pull up or push down the diately before the closed position which the OFF position. If the driver’s door or theswitch toward the close or open side. cannot be detected. Make sure that all front passenger’s door is opened during thisA light press on the switch will cause the passengers have their hands, etc., in- period of about 45 seconds, power to thewindow to open or close until the switch is side the vehicle before closing the win- sunroof is canceled.released. dow.2-36 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • The roof will automatically open or close all the position or for about 45 seconds after the way. To stop the roof, just press the switch ignition key is turned to the OFF position. toward the either side. Depending on the environment or driving Restarting the sunroof sliding switch conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to The switch may become inoperable after the something being caught in the sunroof battery terminal is disconnected, the electrical occurs. supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. WARNING Use the following re-set procedure to return sunroof operation to normal. There are some small distances imme- 1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tilting diately before the closed position which switch toward tilt DOWN (or the sliding cannot be detected. Make sure that all switch toward close) repeatedly to fully passengers have their hands, etc., in- close the lid. side the vehicle before closing the sun- 2. After the lid has closed all the way, keep roof. pushing the tilting switch toward tilt DOWN (or the sliding switch toward close) for more than 1 second. Tilting the sunroof Auto reverse function (When closing To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press the SIC0561 the sunroof) side of the tilt switch. To tilt down the sunroof, press the side ofSliding the sunroof If the control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the the tilt switch.To open the roof, press the switch to the sunroof will immediately open backward. side. Sun shade The auto reverse function can be activated Open/close the sun shade by sliding itTo close the roof, press the switch to the when the sunroof is closed by automatic op- side. backward/forward. eration when the ignition key is in the ON Instruments and controls 2-37 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • INTERIOR LIGHTS (if so equipped)The shade will open automatically when the If the sunroof does not closesunroof is opened. However, it must be closedmanually. Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof. WARNING ¼ In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. ¼ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is clos- ing. CAUTION ¼ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before open- SIC0564A ing. The lights have a three-position switch. ¼ Do not place any heavy object on the When the switch is in the center k position, the sunroof or surrounding area. lights will illuminate when a door or the back door is opened.2-38 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PERSONAL LIGHTSThe ceiling light will stay on for about 30 the following with the ignition switch in theseconds when: ACC or OFF position:¼ The driver’s door is unlocked by the keyfob, ¼ Opening or closing any door a key or the power door lock switch when all ¼ Locking or unlocking any door with the doors are locked. keyfob, a key, or the power door lock switch¼ The driver’s door is opened and then closed ¼ Inserting or removing a key from the ignition without the key in the ignition switch. switch¼ The key is removed from the ignition switch These lights will turn on again when any of the while all doors are closed. above operations is performed after the lightsThe ceiling light will turn off while the 30 have turned off automatically. (The lights willsecond timer is activated when: turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the above as well.)¼ The driver’s door is locked with the keyfob, SIC0565 a key or the power door lock switch. CAUTION When the interior light or the personal light¼ The ignition switch is turned ON. switch is in the ON position, the interior, ¼ Turn off the interior, personal and personal, and vanity mirror lights will auto-When the interior light switch or the personal vanity mirror lights when you leave matically turn off 30 minutes after the igni-light switch is in the ON position, the interior, tion switch has been turned to the OFFpersonal and vanity mirror lights will automati- the vehicle. position. To turn on the light again, insertcally turn off 30 minutes after the ignition ¼ Do not use for extended periods of the key into the ignition switch and move itswitch has been turned to the OFF position to time with the engine stopped. This to the ON position.save the battery. To turn on the lights again, could result in a discharged battery. After the above procedure, the interior, per-insert the key into the ignition switch and move sonal, or vanity mirror lights will automaticallyit to the ON position. turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation ofAfter the above procedure, the interior, per- the following:sonal, or vanity mirror lights will automatically ¼ Opening or closing any doorturn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of ¼ Locking or unlocking the driver’s door Instruments and controls 2-39 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so HomeLink UNIVERSAL equipped) TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)¼ Inserting or removing a key from the ignition The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro- switch vides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-heldThese lights will turn on again when any of the transmitters into one built-in device.above operations is performed after the lightshave turned off automatically. (The lights will HomeLink Universal Transceiver:turn off 30 minutes after the latest operation of ¼ Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)the above as well.) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and CAUTION security systems. ¼ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No ¼ Turn off the interior, personal and separate batteries are required. If the vehi- vanity mirror lights when you leave cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- the vehicle. nected, HomeLink will retain all program- SIC0186 ming. ¼ Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when ¼ Will turn off 30 minutes after the ignition the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. switch has been turned to the OFF position. could result in a discharged battery. Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original trans- mitter for future programming procedures (i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For addi- tional information, refer to “Programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver” later in this section.2-40 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the WARNING hand-held transmitter button and the de- sired HomeLink button. Do not release the¼ Do not use the HomeLink Universal buttons until step 4 has been completed. Transceiver with any garage door NOTE: opener that lacks safety stop and Some garage door openers may require reverse features as required by fed- the procedures noted under “Canadian eral safety standards. (These stan- Programming”. dards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, 1982.) A garage door opener which first slowly and then rapidly. When the cannot detect an object in the path of indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing light a closing garage door and then auto- indicates the HomeLink Universal Trans- SPA0609A matically stop and reverse, does not ceiver has been successfully programmed. meet current federal safety stan- PROGRAMMING HomeLink dards. Using a garage door opener To program the remaining two buttons, follow without these features increases the 1. With the ignition key in the OFF position, steps 2 through 4. risk of serious injury or death. press and hold the two outside buttons, and If, after repeated attempts, you do not suc- release when the indicator light begins to cessfully program the HomeLink Universal¼ During programming, your garage flash (approximately 20 seconds). This pro- Transceiver to learn the signal of the hand- door or gate may open or close. Make cedure erases the factory set default codes held transmitter, refer to “Rolling Code Pro- sure that people and objects are clear and does not have to be followed when gramming” later in this section. of the garage door or gate that you programming additional hand-held trans- are programming. mitters. PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS¼ Your vehicle’s engine should be 2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter turned off while programming the (from the device you wish to train) approxi- Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required HomeLink Universal Transceiver. mately 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting af- from the surface of HomeLink keeping the ter 2 seconds. To program your hand-held indicator light in view. transmitter to HomeLink , continue to press Instruments and controls 2-41 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 ¼ position the hand-held transmitter with its ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMINGthrough 4 under “Programming HomeLink ”) battery area facing away from thewhile you press and re-press (“cycle”) your HomeLink surface. Rolling code garage door openers (or otherhand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until rolling code devices) which are “code pro- ¼ press and hold both the HomeLink and tected” and manufactured after 1996, may bethe indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- determined by the following.successful programming). ruption.NOTE: A. Reference the garage door opener Owner’s ¼ position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 Manual for verification.If programming a garage door opener, etc., inches (50 to 127 mm) away from theit is advised to unplug the device during HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in B. The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-the “cycling” process to prevent possible that position for up to 15 seconds. If gram the HomeLink Universal Transceiverdamage to the garage door opener compo- HomeLink is not programmed within that but does not activate the garage door.nents. time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view C. Press and hold the trained HomeLink but-OPERATING THE HomeLink at all times. ton. If the garage door opener has theUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER rolling code feature, the HomeLink indica- If you continue to have programming difficul- tor light will flash rapidly, then remains onThe HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once ties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer after 2 seconds.programmed) may now be used to activate the Affairs Department. The phone numbers aregarage door, etc. To operate, simply press the located in the Foreword of this Owner’s To program the HomeLink Universal Trans-appropriate programmed HomeLink Univer- Manual. ceiver to a garage door opener with the rollingsal Transceiver button. The red indicator light code feature, follow these instructions afterwill illuminate while the signal is being trans- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED completing the “Programming HomeLink ”mitted. INFORMATION (the aid of a second person may make thePROGRAMMING Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however following procedures quicker and easier).TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS to clear all programming, press and hold the 1. Locate the training button on the garage two outside buttons and release when the door opener motor unit. Exact location andIf the HomeLink does not quickly learn the indicator light begins to flash (approximately color of the button may vary by garage doorhand-held transmitter information: 20 seconds). opener brand. If there is difficulty locating¼ replace the hand-held transmitter batteries the training button, reference the garage with new batteries. door opener Owner’s Manual.2-42 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 2. Press the training button on the garage 2. When the indicator light begins to flash FCC Notice: door opener motor unit (which may activate slowly (after 20 seconds), position the This device complies with FCC rules part a training light). hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 15. Operation is subject to the following 127 mm) away from the HomeLink sur- two conditions: (1) This device may not NOTE: face. cause harmful interference and (2) This Following step 2, there are 30 seconds 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter device must accept any interference that in which to initiate step 3. button. may be received, including interference3. Firmly press and release the programmed that may cause undesired operation. 4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, HomeLink button. Press and release the first slowly and then rapidly. When the The transmitter has been tested and com- HomeLink button a second time to com- indicator light begins to flash rapidly, re- plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules. plete the training process. (Some garage lease both buttons. Changes or modifications not expressly door openers may require you to do this approved by the party responsible for com- procedure a third time to complete the The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button pliance could void the user’s authority to training.) has now been reprogrammed. The new device operate the device. can be activated by pushing the HomeLinkThe garage door opener should now recognize button that was just programmed. This proce- DOC: ISTC 1763K1313the HomeLink Universal Transceiver and ac- dure will not affect any other programmedtivate when the HomeLink button is pressed. FCC I.D.: CB2V67690 HomeLink buttons.The remaining two buttons may now be pro-grammed (if not yet programmed, follow steps IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN2 through 4 in the “Programming HomeLink ” If your vehicle is stolen, you should change theprocedures earlier in this section). codes of any non-rolling code device that hasREPROGRAMMING A SINGLE been programmed into HomeLink . ConsultHomeLink BUTTON the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices forTo reprogram an HomeLink Universal Trans- additional information.ceiver button, complete the following. When your vehicle is recovered, you will1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer- button. Do not release the button until step sal Transceiver with your new transmitter 4 has been completed. information. Instruments and controls 2-43 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO2-44 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO Instruments and controls 2-45 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO2-46 Instruments and controls ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustmentsKeys .......................................................................... 3-2 Glass hatch ............................................................. 3-11Doors ......................................................................... 3-2 Key operation ..................................................... 3-11 Locking with key ................................................... 3-3 Fuel filler lid ............................................................. 3-12 Front window open/close with key ....................... 3-3 Opener operation ............................................... 3-12 Locking with inside lock knob............................... 3-3 Fuel filler cap ...................................................... 3-12 Locking with power door lock switch (if so Steering wheel ........................................................ 3-14 equipped).............................................................. 3-4 Tilt operation....................................................... 3-14 Child safety rear door lock ................................... 3-4 Sun visors ............................................................... 3-14Remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-5 Using the sun visors........................................... 3-14 How to use remote keyless entry system ............ 3-5 Mirrors ..................................................................... 3-15 Battery replacement ............................................. 3-8 Inside mirror ....................................................... 3-15Hood.......................................................................... 3-9 Outside mirrors ................................................... 3-15Rear door ................................................................ 3-10 Automatic seat positioner (if so equipped) ............. 3-16 Key operation ..................................................... 3-10 Automatic seat positioner operation................... 3-16Spare tire carrier (if so equipped) ........................... 3-10 Cancel switch ..................................................... 3-18 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • KEYS DOORS A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to WARNING duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by your NISSAN dealer. ¼ Always have the doors locked while Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System keys: driving. Along with the use of seat The key number is necessary when you need belts, this provides greater safety in extra Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System the event of an accident by helping to keys. As many as 5 Nissan Vehicle Immobi- prevent persons from being thrown lizer System keys can be used with one ve- hicle. New keys must be registered to the from the vehicle. This also helps keep Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System compo- children and others from unintention- nents in your vehicle by your NISSAN dealer. ally opening the doors, and will help At this time, you should bring all Nissan Ve- keep out intruders. hicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to SPA1401 ¼ Before opening any door, always look your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase all for and avoid oncoming traffic.You can only drive your vehicle using the memory of the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer ¼ Do not leave children unattended in-master keys which are registered to the Nissan System components. side the vehicle. They could unknow-Vehicle Immobilizer System components inyour vehicle. These keys have a transponder ingly activate switches or controls.chip in the key head. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.The keys can be used for the door, back dooror glove box locks.Never leave these keys in the vehicle.Record the key number on the key numberplate supplied with your keys and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. NISSAN does not record any keynumber so it is very important to keep track ofyour key number plate.3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ¼ Turning the driver’s door key one time to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the corre- sponding door. From that position, return- ing the key to neutral (where the key can only be removed and inserted.) and turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors. FRONT WINDOW OPEN/CLOSE WITH KEY Turn the driver’s door key to the unlock posi- tion and hold for about 1 second, the front windows will begin to lower. SPA0383 To stop opening, turn the key to the neutral PD1160M position.LOCKING WITH KEY To close the front windows with the door key LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK cylinder, turn the key to the lock position and KNOBManual hold for about 1 second. Pushing or pulling the door inside lock knob toTo lock the door, turn the key towards the front the lock or unlock will lock or unlock theof the vehicle. To unlock, turn it towards the To stop closing, turn the key to the neutral position. corresponding door.rear. In the event of a hand in the way, or other To lock from the outside without a key, movePower obstruction, the auto reverse function will acti- the inside lock knob to the LOCK position. vate. Then close the door. When locking the doorThe power door lock system allows you to lock this way, be certain not to leave the key insideor unlock all doors including the back door the vehicle.simultaneously.¼ Turning the driver’s door key to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • doors will lock once and then unlock automati- cally. SPA0944 SPA0841LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR CHILD SAFETY REAR DOORLOCK SWITCH (if so equipped) LOCKOperating the lock-unlock switch will lock or Child safety locking helps prevent doors fromunlock all doors including the back door simul- being opened accidentally, especially whentaneously. small children are in the vehicle.All door locks will be engaged when the power When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor lock switch is moved to the LOCK posi- rear door can be opened only from thetion with the driver’s or front passenger’s door outside.open. Then close the door and all doors will belocked.When the power door lock switch is moved tothe LOCK position while any front doors isopen and a key is in the ignition switch, all3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRYSYSTEMIt is possible to lock/unlock all doors and the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazardactivate the panic alarm by using the keyfob ¼ Do not drop the keyfob. indicator flashes once.from outside the vehicle. ¼ Do not strike the keyfob sharply If hazard indicator and horn mode is not nec-Before locking the doors, make sure the essary, you can switch to hazard indicator only against another object.key is not left in the vehicle. mode by following the switching procedureThe keyfob can operate at a distance of ap- ¼ Do not place the keyfob for an ex- below.proximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The tended period in an area where tem-effective distance depends upon the condi- peratures exceed 140°F (60°C). In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCKtions around the vehicle.) button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashesAs many as four keyfobs can be used with one If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, recommends erasing the ID code of that neither the hazard indicator nor the horn oper-vehicle. For information concerning the pur- controller. This will prevent the keyfob ates.chase and use of additional keyfobs, contactyour NISSAN dealer. from unauthorized use to unlock the (Switching procedure) vehicle. For information regarding theThe keyfob will not function when: Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK but- erasing procedure, please contact an tons on the keyfob simultaneously for at least¼ the battery is dead, authorized NISSAN dealer. 2 seconds to switch from one mode to the¼ the distance between the vehicle and the other. keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS When pushing the buttons to set hazard indi-The panic alarm will not activate when the ENTRY SYSTEM cator only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3key is in the ignition switch. times. Setting hazard indicator and horn When pushing the buttons to set hazard indi- CAUTION mode cator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once. This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn The following conditions or occurrences mode when you first receive the vehicle. will damage the keyfob. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the ¼ Do not allow the keyfob to become LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator wet. flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPA1260Locking doors ¼ When the LOCK button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes1. Remove the ignition key.*1 twice and the horn chirps once as a re-2. Close all the doors.*2 minder that the doors are already locked.3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob. *1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key is in4. All the doors will lock. the ignition switch. However, the panic alarm will not activate when the ignitionAll of the doors will lock when the LOCK switch is in the ACC or ON position.button on the keyfob is pushed even *2: Doors lock with the keyfob while any doorthough a door remains open and/or the is open. However, hazard indicator andignition key is in the ON position. horn mode will not function.5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • in the center k position with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. 2. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds. ¼ All doors unlock ¼ The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed. If the following operation is not carried out within 5 minutes after pressing the UNLOCK button, all doors will be locked automatically. ¼ any door is opened. ¼ the ignition key is turned to the ON position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking the doors with the keyfob. Opening the front window SPA1373 Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob.Unlocking doors ¼ The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors are completely closed with the igni- The driver’s door will unlock.1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob tion key in any position except the ON Continue to press the UNLOCK button for 3 once. position. seconds. The driver’s and front passenger’s¼ Only the driver’s door unlocks windows will be lowered. ¼ The interior light turns on and the light timer activates for 30 seconds when the switch is Continue to press the UNLOCK button until Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • windows are fully open. Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or equivalentTo stop lowering the windows, release theUNLOCK button. Make sure that the ⊕ side faces the bottomTo start lowering the windows, press the UN- case.LOCK button again for 3 more seconds. 3. Close the lid securely.This function will operate after the ignition 4. Push the keyfob button two or three timesswitch is off and 45 seconds passed or either to check its operation.the front door is opened. See your NISSAN dealer if you need anyUsing the panic alarm assistance for replacement.If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- If the battery is removed for any reasonened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- other than replacement, perform step 4tion as follows: above.1. Push the PANIC button on the keyfob for ¼ Be careful not to touch a circuit board longer than 0.5 seconds. and a battery terminal.2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will ¼ An improperly disposed battery can stay on for 30 seconds. harm the environment. Always confirm3. The panic alarm stops when: local regulations for battery disposal.¼ It has run for 30 seconds, or ¼ The keyfob is water-proof; however, if it SPA1374 does get wet, immediately wipe com-¼ The LOCK or the UNLOCK button is pletely dry. pressed, or BATTERY REPLACEMENT ¼ When changing batteries, do not let dust¼ The panic button is pushed on the keyfob or oil get on the keyfob. for more than 0.5 seconds. Replace the battery as follows: 1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. FCC Notice: 2. Replace the battery with a new one. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer compliance3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • HOODcould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment.This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device. SPA1375 1. Pull the hood lock release handle located below the instrument panel; the hood will WARNING then spring up slightly. 2. Raise the lever at the front of the hood with ¼ Make sure the hood is completely your fingertips and raise the hood. closed and latched before driving. 3. Insert the assist bar into the slot in the front Failure to do so could cause the hood edge of the hood. to fly open and result in an accident. 4. When closing the hood, reset the assist bar ¼ If you see steam or smoke coming to its original position, then slowly close the from the engine compartment, to hood and make sure it locks into place. avoid injury do not open the hood. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • REAR DOOR SPARE TIRE CARRIER (if so equipped) Turning the rear door key one time coun- terclockwise will unlock the rear door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the key can only the re- moved and inserted.) and turning it coun- terclockwise again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors. 2. Pull the opener handle to open the rear door. 3. To lock the rear door, push it down firmly and turn the key clockwise. The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors including the rear SPA0462 SPA0385 door simultaneously. ¼ Turning the front door key to the front of When opening the rear door, first open the WARNING the vehicle will lock all doors. spare tire carrier in the sequence shown in the illustration above. Then insert the stopper into ¼ Turning the front door key one time to the hole to secure the carrier in the open Do not drive with the rear door open. the rear of the vehicle will unlock the position. This could allow dangerous exhaust corresponding door. From that position, gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See returning the key to neutral (where the “Precautions when starting and driving” key can only be removed and inserted.) CAUTION in the “5. Starting and driving” section and turning it to the rear again within 5 for exhaust gas. seconds will unlock all doors. ¼ Be certain that there is adequate area to allow the carrier to open fully. ¼ Open and close the spare tire carrierKEY OPERATION slowly.1. Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the rear door.3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • GLASS HATCH SPA0386 SPA0338D SPA1377 KEY OPERATION Other key operations¼ Before driving, be certain that the spare tire carrier is firmly closed and To open the glass hatch, turn the key fully ¼ Turning the key clockwise locks all doors latched. clockwise and pull the opener handle. To including the back door. close, lower and push the glass hatch down ¼ Turning the key counterclockwise unlocks¼ Failure to do so may injure pedestri- securely. the back door. ans or damage the vehicle. ¼ Turning the key counterclockwise again within 5 seconds unlock all doors. WARNING Do not drive with the glass hatch open. This could allow dangerous exhaust Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FUEL FILLER LID gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Precautions when starting and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas. CAUTION Do not open the glass hatch unless the wiper is in the stowed position. SPA0341 FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. SPA0389 WARNING OPENER OPERATION ¼ Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener lever down. To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely. tions. You could be burned or seri- ously injured if it is misused or mis- handled. Always stop the engine and3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • do not smoke or allow open flames or CAUTION sparks near the vehicle when refuel- ing. ¼ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,¼ Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the flush it away with water to avoid paint cap one-half turn, and wait for any damage. hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel ¼ Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. from spraying out and possible per- Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap sonal injury. Then remove the cap. properly may cause the mal-¼ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank function indicator lamp (MIL) to illu- after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off minate. If the lamp illuminates automatically. Continued refueling because the fuel filler cap is loose or may cause fuel over-flow, resulting in missing, tighten or install the cap and SPA0342 fuel spray and possibly a fire. continue to drive the vehicle. The lamp should turn off after a few Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while¼ Only use an original equipment type driving trips. If the lamp does refueling. fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has not turn off after a few driving trips, a built-in safety valve needed for have the vehicle inspected by an au- proper operation of the fuel system thorized NISSAN dealer. and emission control system. An in- correct cap can result in a serious ¼ For additional information, see the malfunction and possible injury. It “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in could also cause the malfunction in- the “2. Instruments and controls” dicator lamp to come on. section.¼ Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS USING THE SUN VISORS 1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side. 3. Then, to block glare from the front too, swing down the sub-sun visor (if so equipped). 4. To adjust the glare block position, slide the sub-sun visor to the left. SPA0234 CAUTIONTILT OPERATION ¼ Do not store the main sun visor be-While pushing down on the lock lever, adjustthe steering wheel up or down to the desired fore storing the sub-sun visor.position. Push the lock lever up securely to ¼ Do not pull the sub-sun visor forcedlylock the steering wheel in place. downwards. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. SPA03953-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MIRRORS PD1006M SPA1211 PD1183MBINSIDE MIRROR OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror can be moved in any direc- tion for a better rear view.The night position will reduce glare from the The outside mirror will operate only when theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night. ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. WARNING Turn the control knob to the right or left to WARNING select the right or left outside mirror, then Objects viewed in the outside mirror on adjust. the passenger side are closer than they Use the night position only when neces- appear. Be careful when moving to the sary, because it reduces rear view clar- right. Using only this mirror could cause ity. an accident. Use inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC SEAT POSITIONER OPERATION This system is designed so that the driver’s seat will automatically move when the auto- matic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily. When one of the following conditions is met, the driver’s seat will slide backward: ¼ When the key is removed from the ignition switch. ¼ When the driver’s door is opened with the M008 SPA1164 key turned to ACC or LOCK.Foldable outside mirrors ¼ When the key is turned from ON to LOCK drive positioner memory. Follow these proce- with the driver’s door open. dures to use the memory system.Push the mirror backward to fold it. When one of the following conditions is met, 1. Set the automatic transmission selector le- the driver’s seat will return to the positions ver to the P (Park) position. before being set. 2. Turn the ignition ON. ¼ When the key is inserted into the ignition 3. Adjust the driver’s seat and steering column switch. to the desired positions by manually oper- ¼ When the driver’s door is closed with the ating each adjusting switch. For additional key turned to ACC or LOCK. information, see “Seats” in the “1. Seats, ¼ When the key is turned to ON. restraints and supplemental air bag sys- tems” section and “Steering wheel” earlier Procedure for storing memory in this section. Two positions can be stored in the automatic During this step, do not turn the ignition to3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • any positions other than ON. two times with the ignition key in the LOCK ¼ when any two or more of the memory position. switches are simultaneously pushed while4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, the automatic drive positioner is operating. push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at 2. Reset the desired position using the previ- least 1 second. ous procedure. ¼ when the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat is turned on while the automatic drive The indicator light for the pushed memory Selecting the memorized position positioner is operating. switch will come on and stay on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. 1. Set the automatic transmission selector le- ¼ when the cancel switch located on the After the indicator light goes off, the se- ver to the P (Park) position. instrument panel is pushed to cancel. lected positions are stored in the selected 2. Turn the ignition ON. ¼ when the memory switch 1 or 2 is not memory (1 or 2). pushed for at least 1 second. 3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at If memory is stored in the same memory least 1 second. ¼ when the seat has been already moved to switch, the previous memory will be de- the memorized position. leted. The driver’s seat will move to the memo- rized position with the indicator light flash- ¼ when no seat position is stored in theConfirming memory storage ing, and then the light will stay on for memory switch. approximately 5 seconds.¼ Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been When the memory switch 1 or 2 is pushed with stored, the indicator light will come on for the driver’s door open and then the key in- approximately 0.5 seconds. When the serted into the ignition switch within approxi- memory has stored the position, the indica- mately 1 minute, the driver’s seat will move to tor light will stay on for approximately 5 the memorized position. seconds. System operation¼ If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the The automatic drive positioner system will not fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In work or will stop operating under the following such a case, reset the desired positions conditions: using the following procedures. ¼ when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (71. Open and close the driver’s door more than km/h). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPA1165CANCEL SWITCHWhen the CANCEL side of the switch ispushed, the automatic drive positioner systemwill not function.When the AUTO side of the switch is pushed,the system will function.3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systemsVentilators ................................................................. 4-2 AM radio reception ............................................. 4-12Heater and air conditioner (Manual) ......................... 4-2 Audio operation precautions .............................. 4-12 Controls ................................................................ 4-3 FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc Heater operation................................................... 4-4 (CD) player ......................................................... 4-14 Air conditioner operation ...................................... 4-5 FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc Air flow charts....................................................... 4-5 (CD) player/cd changer ...................................... 4-21Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) ..................... 4-8 CD care and cleaning ........................................ 4-26 Automatic operation ............................................. 4-9 FM-AM radio with cassette player — for navigation Manual operation.................................................. 4-9 system equipped models ................................... 4-26 Operating tips ..................................................... 4-10 Steering wheel switch for audio control Ventilation air filter.............................................. 4-10 (if so equipped) ....................................................... 4-30Servicing air conditioner.......................................... 4-10 Antenna .............................................................. 4-31Audio system........................................................... 4-11 Car phone or CB radio ........................................... 4-32 FM radio reception ............................................. 4-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • VENTILATORS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (Manual) WARNING ¼ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is run- ning. ¼ Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly be- come high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or SAA0444 animals.Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction ¼ Do not use the recirculation mode forof ventilators. long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the : This symbol indicates that the vents are windows to fog up. closed when the vent switch is moved to the left. ¼ Positioning of the heating or air con- : This symbol indicates that the vents are ditioning controls should not be done open when the vent switch is moved to while driving so full attention may be the right. given to vehicle operation.4-2 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Air recirculation button Off position Outside air is drawn into the passenger com- partment. Use the off position for normal heater, or air conditioner operation. On position (Indicator light on) Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air recirculation button to the on position when driving on a dusty road or to avoid traffic fumes. SAA0152B Air conditioner buttonCONTROLS — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. This button is provided only for vehicles withFan control dial — Air flows from defroster outlets and air conditioner. foot outlets.This dial turns the fan on and off, and controls Start the engine, move the fan control dial to — Air flows mainly from defroster out- the desired (1 to 4) position and push the airfan speed. lets. conditioner button to turn on the air condi-Air flow control dial Temperature control dial tioner. The indicator light will come on when the air conditioner button is on. To stop the airThis dial allows you to select the air flow This dial allows you to adjust the temperature conditioner, push the switch again to return itoutlets. of the outlet air. to the original position. — Air flows from center and side venti- The air conditioner cooling function oper- lators. ates only when the engine is running. — Air flows from center and side venti- lators and foot outlets. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • HEATER OPERATION 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the 2. Turn the air control dial to the posi- desired position. tion.Heating Defrosting or defogging 3. Turn on the fan control dial.This mode is used to direct hot air from thefloor outlets. This mode is used to defrost/defog the win- 4. Normally turn the temperature control dial dows. to the midpoint between hot and cold.1. Push the air recirculation button to the off position for normal heating. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the off Heating and defogging position.2. Turn the air control dial to the posi- This mode heats the interior and defogs the tion. 2. Turn the air control dial to the posi- windscreen. tion. 1. Push the air recirculation button to the off3. Turn on the fan control dial. 3. Turn on the fan control dial. position.4. Turn the temperature control dial to the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the 2. Turn the air control dial to the posi- desired position between the middle and desired position between the middle and tion. the hot position. the hot position. 3. Turn on the fan control dial.¼ For quick heating, move the air recirculation button to the on position. Be sure to return ¼ To quickly remove ice or fog from the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the the air recirculation button to the off position windows, push the air recirculation button desired position between the middle and for normal heating. to the on position, the fan control dial to 4 the hot position. and the temperature control dial to the fullVentilation hot position. As soon as possible after the Operating tips window is clear, push the air recirculation ¼ Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladeThis mode directs outside air from the side and button to the off position.center vents. and air inlet in front of the windshield. Bi-level heating This will improve heater operation.1. Push the air recirculation button to the off ¼ A slight delay may be experienced when position. This mode directs outside air from the side and turning the air control dial. The system is center vents and hot air from the floor outlets.2. Turn the air control dial to the position. not malfunctioning, it is only the system 1. Push the air recirculation button to the off motors and solenoids switching from one3. Turn on the fan control dial. position. outlet to another.4-4 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Dehumidified heating Operating tipsStart the engine, move the fan control dial to This mode is used to heat and dehumidify. ¼ Keep windows and sun roof closed whilethe desired (1 to 4) position and push in the air the air conditioner is in operation.conditioner button to activate the air condi- 1. Push the air recirculation button to the off position. ¼ After parking in the sun, drive for two ortioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling three minutes with the windows open toand dehumidifying functions will be added to 2. Turn the air control dial to the posi- vent hot air from the passenger compart-the heater operation. tion. ment. Then, close the windows. This willThe air conditioner cooling function oper- 3. Turn on the fan control dial. allow the air conditioner to cool the interiorates only when the engine is running. more quickly. 4. Push on the air conditioner button. TheCooling ¼ The air conditioning system should be indicator light will come on. operated for about ten minutes at leastThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the once a month. This helps prevent dam-1. Push the air recirculation button to the off desired position. age to the system due to lack of lubrica- position. tion. Dehumidified defogging2. Turn the air control dial to the position. ¼ If the coolant temperature gauge exceeds This mode is used to defog the windows and the hot position, turn the air conditioner off.3. Turn on the fan control dial. dehumidify. For additional information, see “If your ve-4. Push on the air conditioner button. The hicle overheats” in the “6. In case of emer- 1. Push the air recirculation button to the off gency” section. indicator light will come on. position.5. Turn the temperature control dial to the 2. Turn the air control dial to the AIR FLOW CHARTS posi- desired position. tion. The following charts show the button and dial¼ For quick cooling when the outside tem- positions for maximum and quick heating, 3. Turn on the fan control dial. cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation perature is high, push the air recirculation button to the on position. Be sure to return 4. Push on the air conditioner button. The switch should always be in the off position the air recirculation button to the off position indicator light will come on. for heating and defrosting. for normal cooling. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SAA0154A SAA0155A4-6 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SAA0156A SAA0157A Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(Automatic) Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. WARNING ¼ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is run- ning. ¼ Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly be- come high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ¼ Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. ¼ Positioning of the heating or air con- ditioning controls should not be done while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. SAA04494-8 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AUTOMATIC OPERATION ment will be maintained automatically. Air Outside air is drawn into the passenger com- flow distribution and fan speed are also partment to improve defogging performance.Cooling and/or dehumidified heating controlled automatically.(AUTO) MANUAL OPERATION ¼ Do not set the temperature lower than theThis mode may be used all year round. The outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys- Fan speed controlsystem works automatically to maintain a tem may not work properly. Push the fan control button to changeconstant temperature. Air flow distribution and ¼ If the windows fog up, do not use the ECON the fan speed manually.fan speed are also controlled automatically. mode. ¼ Push the AUTO button to return to auto-1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will matic control of the fan speed. appear on the display.) Dehumidified defogging 1. Push the DEF switch on. (The indica- Air recirculation2. Push the temperature control button to set the desired temperature. tor light will come on.) Push the air recirculation button to recir- 2. Push the temperature control button culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indi-¼ For normal operation, adjust the tempera- cator light will come on. ture control button to about 75°F (24°C). to set the desired temperature. ¼ To remove ice or fog from the outside of the Push it again to draw outside air into the¼ The temperature of the passenger compart- passenger compartment. The indicator will go ment will be maintained automatically. Air windows, push the manual fan control but- out. flow distribution and fan speed are also ton and set to the maximum position. ¼ The air recirculation button cannot be controlled automatically. ¼ As soon as possible after the windshield is activated when the air conditioner is in the clean, push the AUTO button to return toHeating (ECON) the auto mode. DEF mode.Use this mode when you need to heat only. Air flow control ¼ When the DEF button is pushed, the1. Push the ECON (Economy) button on. air conditioner will automatically be turned Pushing the MODE button selects the air outlet (ECON appears on the display.) on at outside temperatures above 23°F to provide: (−5°C) (for VQ35DE engine models) or2. Push the temperature control button : Air flow from center and side ventilators. 28°F (−2°C) (for VG33E engine models) to to set the desired temperature. defog the windshield. The air recirculation : Air flow from center and side ventilators¼ The temperature of the passenger compart- mode will automatically be turned off. and foot outlets. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER : Air flow mainly from foot outlets. The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed : Air flow from defroster and foot outlets. with the environment in mind.To turn the system off This refrigerant will not harm the earth’sPush the OFF button. ozone layer.OPERATING TIPS However, special charging equipment and lu- bricant are required when servicing your¼ When the engine coolant temperature and NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrig- outside air temperature are low, the air flow erants or lubricants will cause severe damage from the foot outlets may not operate for 0 to your air conditioning system. See “Capaci- to 126 seconds. This is not a malfunction. ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the After the coolant temperature warms up, air “9. Technical and consumer information” sec- flow from the foot outlets will operate nor- tion for air conditioning system refrigerant and mally. SAA0158 lubricant recommendation. The sensor on the instrument panel helps Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service maintain a constant temperature. Do not put your environmentally friendly air conditioning anything on or around this sensor. system. WARNING The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi- enced technician with proper equip- ment.4-10 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AUDIO SYSTEMTurn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance andthe power on switch to turn on the radio. If you interference from other vehicles can worklisten to the radio with the engine not running, against ideal reception. Described below arethe key should be turned to the ACC position. some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other externalinfluences. Intermittent changes in receptionquality normally are caused by these externalinfluences.Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.Radio reception SAA0306Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio FM RADIO RECEPTIONreception. These circuits are designed to ex- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 totend reception range, and to enhance the 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (singlequality of that reception. channel) FM having slightly more range thanHowever there are some general characteris- stereo FM. External influences may some-tics of both FM and AM radio signals that can times interfere with FM station reception evenaffect radio reception quality in a moving ve- if the FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). Thehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. strength of the FM signal is directly related toThese characteristics are completely normal in the distance between the transmitter and re-a given reception area, and do not indicate any ceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path,malfunction in your radio system. exhibiting many of the same characteristics asRemember that a moving vehicle is not the light. For example they will reflect off objects.ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of the Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves awaymovement, reception conditions will constantly Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • from a station transmitter, the signals will tend signals are also subject to interference as they are peeling and loose. If used, the labelto fade and/or drift. travel from transmitter to receiver. could jam in the player.Static and flutter: During signal interference Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing ¼ If a cassette has loose tape, insert afrom buildings, large hills or due to antenna through freeway underpasses or in areas with pencil through one of the cassette hubsposition, usually in conjunction with increased many tall buildings. It can also occur for sev- and rewind the tape firmly around thedistance from the station transmitter, static or eral seconds during ionospheric turbulence hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jam-flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by even in areas where no obstacles exist. ming and wavering sound quality.adjusting the treble control counterclockwise ¼ Over a period of time, the playbackto reduce treble response. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic head, capstan and pinch roller may col-Multipath reception: Because of the reflective lect a tape coating residue as the tape is lights.characteristics of FM signals, direct and re- played. This residue accumulation canflected signals reach the receiver at the same AUDIO OPERATION cause weak or wavering sound, andtime. The signals may cancel each other, should be removed periodically with a PRECAUTIONS head cleaning tape. If the residue is notresulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. Cassette player removed periodically, the player mayThe radio has an FM Diversity reception sys- need to be disassembled for cleaning.tem, which employs two antennas if so ¼ To maintain good quality sound,equipped. One is a rod type antenna; the other NISSAN recommends using cassetteis an antenna printed on the window. This tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length.system automatically switches to the antennawhich is receiving less noise. ¼ Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cas-For additional information, see “Antenna” later settes in their protective cases and awayin this section. from direct sunlight, heat, dust, mois- ture and magnetic sources.AM RADIO RECEPTION ¼ Direct sunlight can cause the cassette toAM signals, because of their low frequency, become deformed. The use of deformedcan bend around objects and skip along the cassettes may cause the cassette to jamground. In addition, the signals can be in the player.bounced off the ionosphere and bent back toearth. Because of these characteristics. AM ¼ Do not use cassettes with labels which4-12 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ¼ During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player com- pletely. ¼ The player may skip while driving on rough roads. ¼ The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the tem- perature before use. ¼ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. ¼ CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work prop- erly. ¼ Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction. ¼ 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter SAA0480 ¼ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)Compact Disc (CD) player ¼ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)¼ Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) ¼ CDs that are not round round discs that have the “COMPACT ¼ CDs with a paper label disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. ¼ CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER Audio main operation Head unit The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high frequency ranges. Noise is also greatly re- duced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range au- tomatically in tape and CD playback. Power/Volume control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the Power/Volume control dial while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. When no CD or tape is loaded, the radio will come on. While the system is on, pushing the Power/Volume con- trol dial turns the system off. To turn the radio off, press the Power/Volume control dial. Turn the Power/Volume control dial to adjust the volume. SAA04734-14 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broad- cast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. TUNE (Tuning): SAA0305 WARNINGAdjusting tone quality and speaker the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio orbalance: cassette tape display appears. The radio should not be tuned whileTo adjust BASS, TRE (Treble), BAL (Balance) FM-AM radio operation driving so full attention may be given toand FAD (Fader), press the AUDIO button until vehicle operation.the desired mode BAS, TRE, FAD or BAL FM-AM band select:appears in the display. Press the or Pushing the FM/AM band select button will Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move button to adjust Bass (BAS) and Treble change the band FM1, FM2 or AM.(TRE) to the desired level. Use the or quickly through the channels, hold either of the button also to adjust Fader (FAD) or When FM/AM band select button is pushed TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 sec-Balance (BAL) modes. FAD adjusts the sound onds. while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,level between the front and rear speakers and the radio will come on at the station last SEEK/SCAN tuning:BAL adjusts the sound between the right and played.left speakers. After 10 seconds, the radio or Push the SEEK/SCAN tuning button orcassette tape display reappears. Once the The last station played will also come on when for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuningsound quality is set to the desired level, press the power knob is turned to ON. begins from high to low or low to high frequen- Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • cies and stops at the next broadcasting sta- Station memory operations:tion. Twelve stations can be set for the FM bandPush the SEEK/SCAN tuning button or (six for FM1, six for FM2). for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning Six stations can be set for the AM band.begins from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stops at each broadcasting station for 1. Tune to the desired station using the10 seconds. Pushing the button again during SEEK/SCAN or TUNE button.this 10 seconds period will stop SCAN tuningand the radio will remain tuned to that station. 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing any of the desired station memory buttonsIf the SEEK/SCAN tuning button is not pushed (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. (Forwithin 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memo-next station. rized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.) 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now com- plete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be can- celled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Cassette tape player operation Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player. SAA0475 The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the4-16 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • cassette tape will begin to play. display window. To stop the FF or REW func- side while the tape is being played. tion, press the (fast forward) or (re- The cassette tape will automatically change wind) again, or the TAPE button. CAUTION directions to play the other side when the first APS (Automatic Program side is completed. Do not force the cassette tape into the Search) FF, APS REW: Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): tape door. This could cause player dam- When the (APS FF) button is pushed Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR age. while the tape is being played, the next pro- encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape gram will start to play from the beginning. Push noise. The indicator will come on. the (APS FF) button several times to skipIf the system is turned off by pushing the Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li- through programs. The tape will advance theON⋅OFF/VOL control knob with the cassette cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor- number of times the button is pushed (up totape still in the player, the tape will resume poration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol nine programs).playing when the system is turned back on. are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories When the (APS REW) button is pushed Licensing Corporation. PLAY: once, the program being played starts over¼ When the TAPE button is pushed with the from the beginning. Push the (APS Metal or chrome tape usage: system turned off and a tape loaded, the REW) button several times to skip back sev- The cassette player will be automatically set to system will come on and the tape will play. eral selections. The tape will go back the high performance play when playing a metal or number of times the button is pushed. Either chrome cassette tape.¼ When the TAPE button is pushed with the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right either the radio or compact disc turned on TAPE EJECT: side of the display window while searching for and the tape loaded, the compact disc or the selection. When this button is pushed with the tape the radio will automatically be turned off and the tape will play. This system searches for the blank intervals loaded, the tape will be ejected. between selections. If there is a blank interval When the tape is ejected while it is being FF (Fast Forward), REW played, the system will be turned off. within one program or there is no interval (Rewind): between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location. Compact Disc (CD) player operationPush the (fast forward) button to fastforward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position PROG (Program): (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW and insert the compact disc into the slot withsymbol illuminates on the right side of the Push the PROG button to change the tape the label side facing up. The compact disc will Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • be guided automatically into the slot and start playing, the tape or radio will automatically be PROG (Program):playing. turned off and the compact disc will start to play. When the PROG button is pushed while theAfter loading the disc, the number of tracks on compact disc is being played, the play patternthe disc and the play time will appear on the FF (Fast Forward), REW will change as follows:display. (Rewind): no mark: All the programs will be playedIf the radio or tape is already operating, it will When the (fast forward) or (rewind)automatically turn off and the compact disc will repeatedly in sequence. button is pushed while the compact disc isplay. being played, the compact disc will play while 1: Only one program (the one being played fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button when the PROG button is pushed) will be CAUTION is released, the compact disc will return to repeated. normal play speed. RANDOM: Programs will be played at random, Do not force the compact disc into the APS (Automatic Program not following the sequence on the compact slot. This could damage the player. Search) FF, APS REW: disc. The same program may be repeated When the (APS FF) button is pushed twice. while the compact disc is being played, the When the compact disc is ejected, theIf the system has been turned off while the program next to the present one will start tocompact disc was playing, pushing the play pattern will automatically change to play from its beginning. Push several times toON⋅OFF/VOL control knob will start the com- no mark. skip through programs. The compact disc willpact disc. advance the number of times the button is CD EJECT:8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used pushed. (When the last program on the com- When the CD EJECT button is pushed with thewithout an adapter. pact disc is skipped through, the first program compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be will be played.) When the (APS REW) PLAY: ejected. button is pushed, the program being playedWhen the CD/CHG button is pushed with the returns to its beginning. Push several times to When the button is pushed twice consecutivelysystem off and the compact disc loaded, the skip back through programs. The compact disc the compact disc will be ejected further thansystem will turn on and the compact disc will will go back the number of times the button is when pushed once.start to play. pushed. When this button is pushed while the compactWhen the CD/CHG button is pushed with the disc is being played, the compact disc willcompact disc loaded but the tape or the radio come out and the system will turn off.4-18 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • If the compact disc comes out and is notremoved, it will be pulled back into the slotto protect it. (without 8 cm diameter com-pact discs)CD IN indicator:CD IN indicator appears on the display whenthe CD is loaded with the system on. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 1. CD LOAD button 2. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK CHANGE button 3. ON⋅OFF/VOLUME control knob 4. SCAN tuning button 5. AUTO.P (Automatic preset) button 6. CD play button 7. TAPE play button 8. FM/AM band select button 9. PTY (Program type) button 10.RPT (repeat) play button 11.AUDIO (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BAL- ANCE and NR (Dolby)) button 12.CD EJECT button 13.RADIO TUNE/FF⋅REW/AUDIO (Bass, treble, fader, balance) ADJUSTING button 14.Station and preset (FM/AM)/CD insert or CD play select button 15.TAPE EJECT button SAA05574-20 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE To turn the radio off, press the ON⋅OFF/VOL set to the desired level, press the AUDIOPLAYER AND COMPACT DISC control knob. button repeatedly until the radio or cassette tape display appears.(CD) PLAYER/CD CHANGER Turn the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob to adjust the volume. Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li-Audio main operation cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor- AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, poration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbolHead unit BALANCE, SCV and NR (Dolby)): are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesThe radio has an FM diversity reception sys- Press the AUDIO button to change the select- Licensing Corporation.tem, which employs two antennas printed on ing mode as follows. Metal or chrome tape usage:the front windshield. This system automaticallyswitches to the antenna which is receiving less BASS , TREBLE , FADER , BALANCE , The cassette player will be automatically set tointerference. NR (when cassette playing) , BASS high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.The tape deck employs a permalloy head To adjust BASS, Treble, Fader and Balance,which allows for improved reproduction of high press the AUDIO button until the desired mode FM-AM radio operationfrequency ranges. Noise is also greatly re- BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE ap- FM/AM band select:duced by the combined use of the Dolby NR pears in the display. Press the TUNE(Noise Reduction) system. The auto loudness ( ) or ( ) button to adjust Bass and Pushing the FM/AM band select button willcircuit enhances the low frequency range au- Treble to the desired level. Use the or change the band as follows:tomatically in both radio reception and tape button also to adjust Fader or Balance AM , FM1 , FM2 , AMand CD playback. modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance ad- When FM/AM band select button is pushedON⋅OFF/Volume control: justs the sound between the right and left while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then speakers. the radio will come on at the station lastpush the ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob while the played. To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF orsystem is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or ON, press the or (TUNE) button The last station played will also come on whenCD) which was playing immediately before the while cassette tape is playing. When Dolby is the power knob is turned to ON.system was turned off. When no CD or tape is ON, the display indicates the mark.loaded, the radio will come on. While the If a compact disc or tape is playing when thesystem is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/VOL con- After 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, thetrol knob turns the system off. display reappears. Once the sound quality is compact disc or tape will automatically be Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • turned off and the last radio station played will casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the Automatic preset button:come on. button again during this 5 seconds period will To select the preset FM, AM or PTY station, stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remainThe FM stereo indicator ST will glow during push the AUTO.P button for less than 1.5FM stereo reception. When the stereo broad- tuned to that station. seconds.cast signal is weak, the radio will automatically If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed withinchange from stereo to monaural reception. To preset the FM, AM or PTY station, push the 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next AUTO.P button for more than 1.5 seconds. TUNE (Tuning): station. Station memory operations: Program type button: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band When PTY button is pressed during FM mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is WARNING (six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can displayed. During this time if the PTY data be set for the AM band. code is zero, or the data is unreadable; the The radio should not be tuned while 1. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK, display will show NONE. driving so full attention may be given to SCAN or TUNE button. vehicle operation. 1. PTY selection mode 2. Select the desired station and keep pushing any of the desired station memory buttons PTY name selection can be done by the (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. (For up/down TUNE button or in theUse these buttons for manual tuning. To move example, in the diagram ch2 is to be memo- PTY selection mode.quickly through the channels, hold either of the rized. The radio mutes when the selectTUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 sec- After selecting a PTY name, push the TUNE button is pushed.)onds. button or within 10 seconds. Tun- 3. The indicator ch2 will then come on and the ing to the PTY station will start. If you do not SEEK tuning: sound will resume. Memorizing is now com- push the TUNE button within the 10 secondPush the SEEK button or , to tune plete. period, the PTY mode will be canceled.from high to low or low to high frequencies and 4. Other buttons can be set in the same It is possible to shift the PTY name by onestops at the next broadcasting station. manner. step, with one push of the up/down tuning SCAN tuning: button or . If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thePush the SCAN tuning button to tune from low fuse blows, the radio memory will be can- PTY name selection can also be achieved byto high frequencies and stops at each broad- celled. In that case, reset the desired stations. pressing the preset buttons.4-22 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Initial PTY names are stored in the preset Cassette tape player operation and the tape will play.buttons; but these can be changed by pressingthe preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then ¼ When the TAPE button is pushed while thewhen the desired PTY name is in the display. lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape tape is being played, the tape side will be door. The cassette tape will be automatically changed. pulled into the player. FF (Fast Forward), REW The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the (Rewind): cassette tape will begin to play. Push the (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the CAUTION (rewind) button. Either the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the right side of the display window. To stop the FF or REW func- Do not force the cassette tape into the tion, press the (fast forward) or (re- tape door. This could cause player dam- wind) again, or the TAPE button. age. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW: If the system is turned off by pushing the When the (APS FF) button is pushed ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob with the cassette while the tape is being played, the next pro- tape still in the player, the tape will resume gram will start to play from the beginning. Push playing when the system is turned back on. the (APS FF) button several times to skip2. PTY SCAN tuning mode PLAY: through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up toPush the SCAN tuning button to tune the PTY ¼ When the TAPE button is pushed with the nine programs).name station, and stop at each broadcasting system turned off and a tape loaded, thestation for 5 seconds. Pushing the button system will come on and the tape will play. When the (APS REW) button is pushedagain during this 5 second period will stop once, the program being played starts overSCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to ¼ When the TAPE button is pushed with from the beginning. Push the (APSthat station. If the SCAN tuning button is not either the radio or compact disc turned on REW) button several times to skip back sev-pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves and the tape loaded, the compact disc or eral selections. The tape will go back theto the next station. the radio will automatically be turned off number of times the button is pushed. Either Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • the FF or REW symbol flashes on the right be guided automatically into the slot and start The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on theside of the display window while searching for playing. display.the selection. After loading the disc, the number of tracks on PLAY:This system searches for the blank intervals the disc and the play time will appear on the display. When the CD6 button is pushed with thebetween selections. If there is a blank interval system off and the compact disc loaded, thewithin one program or there is no interval If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will system will turn on and the compact disc willbetween programs, the system may not stop in play. start to play.the desired or expected location. When the CD6 button is pushed with the SCAN tuning: CAUTION compact disc loaded but the tape or the radioPush the SCAN tuning button while playing playing, the tape or radio will automatically betape, and it stops at the next tape program for Do not force the compact disc into the turned off and the compact disc will start to5 seconds. Pushing the button again during play. slot. This could damage the player.this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and FF (Fast Forward), REWthe tape program is continued. If the SCAN (Rewind):tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, If the system has been turned off while theSCAN tuning moves to the next tape program. compact disc was playing, pushing the When the (fast forward) or (rewind) ON⋅OFF/VOL control knob will start the com- button is pushed while the compact disc is TAPE EJECT: pact disc. being played, the compact disc will play whileWhen this button is pushed with the tape fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button 8 cm diameter compact discs can also be usedloaded, the tape will be ejected. is released, the compact disc will return to without an adapter.When the tape is ejected while it is being normal play speed. LOAD button:played, the system will be turned off. APS (Automatic To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the Program Search) FF,Compact disc (CD) changer LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. And APS REW:operation select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert When the (APS FF) button is pushed select button (1 to 6) then insert the CD.Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position while the compact disc is being played, theand insert the compact disc into the slot with To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the program next to the present one will start tothe label side facing up. The compact disc will LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. play from its beginning. Push several times to4-24 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • skip through programs. The compact disc will REPEAT (RPT): To eject all the discs, push the EJECT buttonadvance the number of times the button is for more than 1.5 seconds. When the RPT button is pushed while thepushed. (When the last program on the com- If the compact disc comes out and is not compact disc is played, the play pattern can bepact disc is skipped through, the first program removed, it will be pulled back into the slot changed as follows:will be played.) When the (APS REW) to protect it. (without 8 cm diameter com-button is pushed, the program being played pact discs)returns to its beginning. Push several times toskip back through programs. The compact disc CD IN indicator:will go back the number of times the button is DISPLAY CD TEXT: CD IN indicator appears on the display whenpushed. the CD is loaded with the system on. To indicate the CD mode text, push the PTYCD PLAY button: button during CD playing.To change CD, push the CD play select button To change the indicated text, push the PTY(1 to 6). button. SCAN tuning: The text will change as follows:When the SCAN tuning button is pushed forless than 1.5 seconds while the CD is beingplayed, the beginning of all the tracks of CDswill be played for 10 seconds in sequence. If the text is more than 11 letters, push theWhen the SCAN tuning button is pushed for AUTO.P button to display the remaining text.more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is beingplayed, the first program in all the CDs will be CD EJECT:played for 10 seconds. When the CD EJECT button is pushed with thePushing the button again during this 10 sec- compact disc loaded, the compact disc will beond period will stop SCAN tuning. ejected.If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within To eject the discs selected by the CD select10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next button, push the EJECT button for less thandisc program. 1.5 seconds. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SAA0451 SAA0546CD CARE AND CLEANING FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE the radio comes on. Pushing the PLAYER — for navigation system ON⋅OFF/Volume control dial again turns the¼ Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the system off. surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. equipped models Turn the ON⋅OFF/Volume control dial to adjust¼ Always place the discs in the storage case Refer to the separate Owner’s Manual for the volume. when they are not being used. information about the navigation system.¼ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft Audio main operation cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular ON⋅OFF/Volume control: motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then push alcohol intended for industrial use. the ON⋅OFF/Volume control dial. The mode¼ A new disc may be rough on its inner and (radio or cassette) which was playing immedi- outer edges. Remove the rough edges us- ately before the system was turned off re- ing the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. sumes playing. When no cassette is loaded,4-26 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, FM-AM radio operation TUNE (Tuning):BALANCE): FM-AM band select:Press the AUDIO button to change the select- Pushing the FM-AM band select button will WARNINGing mode as follows: change the band as follows:BASS , TREBLE , FADER , BALANCE , The radio should not be tuned while AM , AM (preset station) , FM1 , FM2 ,BASS driving so full attention may be given to FM (preset station) , AM vehicle operation.To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader, Balance, press When FM/AM band select button is pushedthe AUDIO button until the desired mode while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON,BASS, TREBLE, FADER or BALANCE ap- the radio will come on at the station last Use these buttons for manual tuning. To movepears in the display. played. quickly through the channels, hold either of thePress the or button to adjust Bass TUNE buttons down for more than 0.5 sec- The last station played will also come on whenand Treble to the desired level. Use the onds. the power knob is turned to ON. or button to adjust Fader or Bal- SCAN tuning:ance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level If a compact disc or tape is playing when thebetween the front and rear speakers and Bal- FM/AM band select button is turned to ON, the Push the SCAN tuning button then SCAN willance adjusts the sound level between the right compact disc or tape will automatically be illuminate in the display window. SCAN tuningand left speakers. turned off and the last radio station played will begins from high to low or low to high frequen- come on. cies and stops at each broadcasting station forAfter 10 seconds, the radio or cassette tape The FM stereo indicator, ST illuminates during 5 seconds. Pushing the button again duringdisplay reappears. Once the sound quality isset to the desired level, press the AUDIO FM stereo reception. When the stereo broad- this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning andbutton repeatedly until the radio or cassette cast signal is weak, the radio automatically the radio remains tuned to that station.tape display appears. changes from stereo to monaural reception. If any of the SEEK/SCAN tuning buttons are not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningRadio/Cassette tape priority mode moves to the next station.In this mode, the radio station illuminates in the Station memory (and preset) operations:display during radio operation. During cassettetape operation, TAPE illuminates in the dis- Twelve stations can be set for the FM bandplay. (six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • be set for the AM band. It is possible to shift the PTY name by one 2. PTY SEEK tuning step, with one push of the up/down tuning1. Tune to the desired station using the SCAN After selecting a PTY name, push the button or . or TUNE buttons. TUNE button or within 10 sec- PTY name selection can also be achieved by onds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If2. Select the desired station and keep pushing pressing the preset buttons. you do not push the TUNE button within the any of the desired station memory buttons 10 second period, the PTY mode will be (1 to 6) until a beep sound is heard. (The Initial PTY names are stored in the preset canceled. radio mutes when the select button is buttons; but these can be changed by pressing pushed.) the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds 3. PTY SCAN tuning mode when the desired PTY name is in the display.3. The indicator ch2 will come on and the Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the PTY name station, and stop at each broad- sound will resume. Memorizing is now com- casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the plete. button again during this 5 second period will4. Other station select buttons can be set in stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain the same manner. tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds,If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the SCAN tuning moves to the next station.radio fuse opens, the radio memory is can-celled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Cassette tape player operation Program type: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then carefully insert a cassette tape into the tapeWhen PTY button is pressed during FM mode, door.the PTY name of the current tuned station isdisplayed. During this time if the PTY data The cassette tape automatically pulls into thecode is zero, or the data is unreadable; the player. The word TAPE and moving digitaldisplay will show NONE. squares illuminate on the right side of the display window.1. PTY selection mode PTY name selection can be done by the up/down TUNE button or in the PTY selection mode.4-28 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FF (fast forward), REW FF or REW function the tape enters the normal CAUTION (rewind): play mode. Push either the FF or REW button for the Dolby NR (Noise Reduction): Do not force the cassette tape into the desired direction. Push the Dolby NR button for Dolby NR tape door. This could cause player dam- The FF or REW symbol illuminates in the encoded tapes to reduce high frequency tape age. noise. The indicator light comes on. display. To stop the FF or REW function, press the FF Dolby NR is manufactured under license fromThe cassette tape automatically changes di- Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. or REW button again, or the TAPE/CD button.rections to play the other side when the first DOLBY NR and the double-D symbolside is complete. At this time, the moving APS (automatic program are trademarks of Dolby Laboratoriesdigital squares illuminate on the left side of the search) FF, APS REW: Licensing Corporation.display window. Push either the APS FF or APS REW button Metal or chrome tape usage: PLAY: while the cassette tape is playing. The tape The cassette player is automatically set to highWhen the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the runs quickly, stops, then plays the next selec- performance play when playing a metal orradio turned on and the tape loaded, the radio tion. Either the FF or REW symbol flashes in chrome cassette tape.will automatically be turned off and the tape the display while searching for the selection.will play. TAPE EJECT: This system searches at the blank intervalsIf the TAPE/CD button is pushed during either between selections. If there is a blank interval Push the EJECT button. The cassette tapethe FF, REW, APS FF or APS REW function, within one selection or there is no interval automatically comes out.the cassette tape enters the normal play between selections, the system may not stopmode. in the desired or expected location.When the TAPE/CD button is pushed with the PROG (program):CD playing, the tape will play. Push the PROG button. The moving digital squares illuminate on either the right or left side of the display window to indicate the side of program play. If the PROG button is pushed during either the Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) than 1.5 seconds to change the preset radio or button for more than 1.5 sec- channels. onds again. Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch or for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station. APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW (tape or CD changer): Push the tuning switch or for less 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip SAA0464 through programs.“MODE” select switch This system searches for the blank intervalsPush the mode select switch to change the between selections. If there is a blank intervalmode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2, CD within one program or there is no intervalplayer, CD autochanger and Tape. between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.Volume control switches FF REW (tape or CD changer):Push the upper or lower side switch to in- Push the tuning switch or for morecrease or decrease the volume. than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the Tuning tape or to change the playing disc up or down.Memory change (radio): In CD player operation, pushing the tuning switch changes the track up or down.Push the tuning switch or for less To stop the FF or REW function, press the4-30 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • antenna rod cannot be hand tightened to the proper specification. antenna outlet and there is enough space for it to extend. CAUTION ¼ To prevent damage, be sure that power antenna is fully retracted be- ¼ Always properly tighten the antenna fore the vehicle enters an automated rod during installation or the antenna car wash. rod may bend or break during vehicle ¼ Dirt and other foreign matter on the operation. power antenna rod may interrupt its ¼ To prevent damage, be sure that operation. Clean the rod periodically manual antenna is removed before with a damp cloth. This type of clean- the vehicle enters an automated car ing is especially important during the SAA0164 wash. winter seasons in areas where road salt and other chemicals may beANTENNA spread on road surfaces andManual antenna Power antenna splashed onto the antenna rod.The manual antenna on your vehicle remains The antenna will automatically extend whenin the upper position at all times. The antenna the radio is turned on, and retract whencannot be shortened, but can be removed. switched off. If the radio is left on, the antennaWhen you need to remove the antenna, turn will retract and extend with the ignition keythe antenna nut counterclockwise. To install OFF-ON operation.the antenna rod, turn the antenna nut clock-wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification CAUTIONusing a suitable tool, such as an open-endwrench. The antenna rod tightening specifica- ¼ Before turning the radio on, maketion is 3.4 to 3.6 N⋅m (30 to 32 in-lb). Do notuse pliers to tighten the antenna as they can sure that there is no one near theleave marks on the antenna surface. The Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CAR PHONE OR CB RADIOWhen installing a car phone or CB, ham radioin your NISSAN, be sure to observe the follow- CAUTIONing cautions, otherwise the new equipmentmay adversely affect the Engine control sys- ¼ Keep the antenna as far as possibletem and other electronic parts. away from the Engine Control Module (ECM). WARNING ¼ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in ¼ A cellular telephone should not be (20 cm) away from the Multiport Fuel used while driving so full attention Injection harness. Do not route the may be given to vehicle operation. antenna wire next to any harness. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of ¼ Adjust the antenna standing-wave ra- cellular telephones while driving. tio as recommended by the manufac- ¼ If you must make a call while your turer. vehicle is in motion, the hands free ¼ Connect the ground wire from the CB cellular phone operational mode (if radio chassis to the body. so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times ¼ For details, consult an authorized so full attention may be given to ve- NISSAN dealer. hicle operation. ¼ If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.4-32 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 5 Starting and drivingPrecautions when starting and driving...................... 5-2 Break-in schedule ................................................... 5-19 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......................... 5-2 Increasing fuel economy ......................................... 5-19 Three way catalyst ............................................... 5-3 Using part time four wheel drive (4WD) ................. 5-20 On-pavement and offroad driving precautions..... 5-3 Transfer case shifting procedures...................... 5-21 Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-4 Using all-mode four wheel drive (4WD).................. 5-23 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ....................... 5-4 Transfer case shifting procedures...................... 5-23 Driving safety precautions .................................... 5-4 Parking/parking on hills ........................................... 5-30Ignition switch............................................................ 5-6 Power steering ........................................................ 5-31 Automatic transmission ........................................ 5-6 Brake system .......................................................... 5-32 Manual transmission ............................................ 5-7 Braking precautions............................................ 5-32 Key positions ........................................................ 5-8 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ............................ 5-32 Nissan vehicle immobilizer system ...................... 5-8 Cold weather driving ............................................... 5-34Before starting the engine......................................... 5-9 Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. 5-34Starting the engine .................................................... 5-9Driving the vehicle................................................... 5-10 Anti-freeze .......................................................... 5-34 Automatic transmission ...................................... 5-10 Battery ................................................................ 5-34 Manual transmission .......................................... 5-14 Draining of coolant water ................................... 5-34Parking brake .......................................................... 5-16 Tire equipment ................................................... 5-34Cruise control (if so equipped)................................ 5-17 Special winter equipment ................................... 5-35 Precautions on cruise control............................. 5-17 Driving on snow or ice ....................................... 5-35 Cruise control operations ................................... 5-17 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ................. 5-35 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide) WARNING 2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and the fan control at 4 (high) WARNING to circulate the air. ¼ Do not leave children, impaired adults, or pets alone in your vehicle. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con- ¼ If electrical wiring or other cable con- They could accidentally injure them- nections must pass to a trailer tain colorless and odorless carbon mon- selves or others through inadvertent through the seal on the back door or oxide. Carbon monoxide is a dangerous. operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, the body, follow the manufacturer’s It can cause unconsciousness or death. sunny days, temperatures in a closed recommendation to prevent carbon vehicle could quickly become high ¼ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are monoxide entry into the vehicle. enough to cause severe or possibly entering the vehicle, drive with all fatal injuries to people or animals. windows fully open, and have the ¼ If a special body or other equipment vehicle inspected immediately. is added for recreational or other us- ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre- age, follow the manufacturer’s rec- vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not ¼ Do not run the engine in closed ommendation to prevent carbon place cargo higher than the seat- spaces such as a garage. monoxide entry into the vehicle. backs. In a sudden stop or collision, (Some recreational vehicle appli- ¼ Do not park the vehicle with the en- unsecured cargo could cause per- ances such as stoves, refrigerator, gine running for any extended length sonal injury. heaters, etc. may also generate car- of time. bon monoxide.) ¼ Keep the back door and glass hatch closed while driving, otherwise ex- ¼ The exhaust system and body should haust gases could be drawn into the be inspected by a qualified mechanic passenger compartment. If you must whenever: drive with the back door on glass a. The vehicle is raised for service. hatch open, follow these precautions: b. You suspect that exhaust fumes 1. Open all the windows. are entering into the passenger5-2 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • compartment. CAUTION ¼ Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. ¼ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously re- ON-PAVEMENT AND OFFROAD d. You have had an accident involv- duce the three way catalyst’s ability DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ing damage to the exhaust system, to help reduce exhaust pollutants. underbody, or rear of the vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher ¼ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- rollover rate than other types of vehicles. tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orTHREE WAY CATALYST electrical systems can cause over- They have higher ground clearance than pas- senger cars to make them capable of perform-The three way catalyst is an emission control rich fuel flow into the three way cata- ing in a variety of on-pavement and offroaddevice, installed in the exhaust system. In the lyst, causing it to overheat. Do not applications. This gives them a higher centerconverter, exhaust gases are burned at high keep driving if the engine misfires, or of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage oftemperatures to help reduce pollutants. if noticeable loss of performance or higher ground clearance is a better view of the other unusual operating conditions road, allowing you to anticipate problems. WARNING are detected. Have the vehicle in- However, they are not designed for cornering spected promptly by an authorized at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports ¼ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- NISSAN dealer. cars are designed to perform satisfactorily tem are very hot. Keep people, ani- ¼ Avoid driving with an extremely low under offroad conditions. If at all possible, mals or flammable materials away fuel level. Running out of fuel could avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, par- from the exhaust system compo- cause the engine to misfire, damag- ticularly at high speeds. As with other vehicles nents. ing the three way catalyst. of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle ¼ Do not stop or park the vehicle over ¼ Do not race the engine while warming rollover. flammable materials, such as dry it up. grass, waste paper or rags. They may Be sure to read the driving safety precautions ignite and cause a fire. later in this section. Starting and driving 5-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AVOIDING COLLISION AND an unbelted person is significantly more Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!ROLLOVER likely to die than a person wearing a seat And that’s true for drugs too (over the counter, belt. prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if WARNING DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired DRIVING by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss WARNING DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS of control or an accident. Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and Never drive under the influence of alco- offroad use. However, avoid driving in deepBe alert and drive defensively at all times. hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly de-Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive reduces coordination, delays reaction signed for leisure use, unlike a conventionalspeed, high speed cornering, or sudden steer- time and impairs judgement. Driving af- offroad vehicle.ing maneuvers, because these driving prac- ter drinking alcohol increases the likeli- Remember that two wheel drive models aretices could cause you to lose control of your hood of being involved in an accident less capable than four wheel drive models forvehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of con- injuring yourself and others. Addition-trol could result in a collision with other rough road driving and extrication when stuck ally, if you are injured in the accident, in deep snow or mud, or the like.vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to alcohol can increase the severity of therollover, particularly if the loss of control Please observe the following precautions: injury.causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Beattentive at all times, and avoid driving whentired. Never drive when under the influence of Nissan is committed to safe driving. But, you WARNINGalcohol or drugs (including prescription or must choose not to drive under the influence ofover-the-counter drugs which may cause alcohol. Every year thousands of people are ¼ Drive carefully when off the road anddrowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as avoid dangerous areas. Every person injured or killed in alcohol related accidents.outlined in the “1. Seats, restraints and supple- who drives or rides in this vehicle Although the local laws vary on what is con-mental air bag systems” section of this should be seated with their seat beltmanual, and also instruct your passengers to sidered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is thatdo so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury alcohol affects all people differently and mostin collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, people underestimate the effects of alcohol.5-4 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • fastened. This will keep you and your duced, resulting in a possible acci- and use a low gear to control your passengers in position when driving dent. speed. over rough terrain. ¼ Stay alert when driving to the top of a ¼ Unsecured cargo can be thrown¼ Before driving up or down grades, hill. At the top there could be a drop- around when driving over rough ter- check the road surface for bumps or off or other hazard that could cause rain. Properly secure all cargo so it potholes. Be sure to climb a gentle an accident. will not be thrown forward and cause slope and descend a gentle slope. injury to you or your passengers. ¼ Stay alert when driving to the top of a¼ Do not drive across steep slopes. hill. At the top there could be a drop- ¼ To avoid raising the center of gravity Instead drive either straight up or off or other hazard that could cause excessively, do not exceed the rated straight down the slopes. Off-road an accident. capacity of the roof rack and evenly vehicles can tip over sideways much distribute the load. Secure heavy ¼ If your engine stalls or you cannot more easily than they can forward or loads in the cargo area as far forward make it to the top of a steep hill, never backward. and as low as possible. Do not equip attempt to turn around. Your vehicle the vehicle with tires larger than¼ Many hills are too steep for any ve- could tip or roll over. Always back specified in this manual. This could hicle. If you drive up them, you may straight down in R (Reverse) gear. cause your vehicle to roll over. stall. If you drive down them, you may Never back down in N (Neutral) or not be able to control your speed. If with the clutch depressed (manual ¼ Do not grip the inside or spokes of you drive across them, you may roll transmission vehicles), using only the steering wheel when driving of- over. the brake, as this could cause loss of froad. The steering wheel could move control. suddenly and injure your hands. In-¼ Do not shift gears while driving on stead drive with your fingers and downhill grades as this could cause ¼ Heavy braking going down a hill thumbs on the outside of the rim. loss of control of the vehicle. could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control ¼ Before operating the vehicle, ensure¼ Be sure to use the engine brake. The and an accident. Apply brakes lightly that the driver and all passengers foot brake performance may be re- Starting and driving 5-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • IGNITION SWITCH have their seat belts fastened. and/or a roll over accident. ¼ Always drive with the floor mats in ¼ Always use tires of the same type, place as the floor may become hot. size, brand, construction (bias, bias- belted or radial), and tread pattern on ¼ Lower your speed when encounter- all four wheels. Install tire chains on ing strong crosswinds. With a higher the rear wheels when driving on slip- center of gravity, your NISSAN is pery roads and drive carefully. more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle ¼ Be sure to check the brakes immedi- control. ately after driving in mud or water. See “Brake system” later in this sec- ¼ Do not drive beyond the performance tion for wet brakes. of the tires, even with 4WD engaged. SSD0083 ¼ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep Accelerating quickly, sharp steering hills. If you get out of the vehicle and AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION maneuvers or sudden braking may it rolls forward, backward or side- cause loss of control. On automatic transmission models, the igni- ways, you could be injured. ¼ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning tion lock is designed so that the key cannot be ¼ Whenever you drive off-road through turned to LOCK and removed until the selector maneuvers, particularly at high sand, mud or water as deep as the lever is moved to the P (Park) position. speeds. Your NISSAN four wheel wheel hub, more frequent mainte- drive vehicle has a higher center of When removing the key from the ignition, nance may be required. See “Periodic gravity than a two wheel drive ve- make sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) maintenance” in the “Service and position. hicle. The vehicle is not designed for Maintenance Guide”. cornering at the same speeds as con- If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park), ventional two wheel drive vehicles. the key cannot be moved toward LOCK. Failure to operate this vehicle cor- When the key cannot be turned toward the rectly could result in loss of control LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key:5-6 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 1) Move the selector lever into the P (Park) position. WARNING2) Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direction. Never remove or turn the key to the3) Turn the key toward the LOCK position. LOCK position while driving. The steer- ing wheel will lock. This may cause the4) Remove the key. driver to lose control of the vehicle andIf the key is removed from the ignition switch, could result in serious vehicle damagethe selector lever cannot be moved from P or personal injury.(Park). The selector lever can be moved ifthe ignition switch is in the ON position andthe foot brake pedal is depressed.There is an OFF position in between LOCK SSD0082Cand ACC, although it does not show on thelock cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the MANUAL TRANSMISSIONsteering wheel is not locked. The switch includes an anti-theft steering lockIn order for the steering wheel to be locked, it device.must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position. The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in the LOCK position.To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. To On manual transmission models, to turn theunlock the steering wheel, insert the key ignition key to LOCK from ACC or ON, first turnand turn it gently while rotating the steer- the key to OFF and turn the key to LOCK whileing wheel slightly right and left. pushing the key in. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to Starting and driving 5-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • the LOCK position. Remove the key. To ON (Normal operating position) (3) (which may have caused the interference)unlock the steering wheel, insert the key separate from the registered Nissan Ve- This position turns on the ignition system and hicle Immobilizer System key.and turn it gently while rotating the steer- the electrical accessories.ing wheel slightly right and left. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN START (4) recommends placing the registered Nissan WARNING This position activates the starter motor, start- Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate ing the engine. key ring to avoid interference from other de- vices. Never remove or turn the key to the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER LOCK position while driving. The steer- ing wheel will lock. This may cause the SYSTEM driver to lose control of the vehicle and The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will could result in serious vehicle damage not allow the engine to start without the use of or personal injury. the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem key.KEY POSITIONS If the engine fails to start using the registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key (forLOCK (Normal parking position) (0) example, when interference is caused by an-The ignition key can only be removed when other Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key,the switch is at this position. an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart theOFF (1) engine using the following procedures:The engine can be turned off without locking 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionthe steering wheel. for approximately 5 seconds.ACC (Accessories) (2) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 5 seconds.This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not 3. Repeat step 1 and 2.running. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device5-8 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE¼ Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. Use the accelerator pedal to help start the clear. engine. 2. Automatic transmission:¼ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake and clutch fluid, window washer Move the selector lever to P (Park position) CAUTION fluid as frequently as possible, at least or N (Neutral position). (P preferred) whenever you refuel. The selector lever cannot be moved out Do not operate the starter for more than¼ Check to be sure that all windows and light of P and into any of the other gear 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does lenses are clean. positions if the ignition key is turned to not start, turn the key off and wait 10 LOCK or if the key is removed from the seconds before cranking again, other-¼ Visually inspect tires for their appearance switch. and condition. Also check tires for proper wise the starter could be damaged. inflation. The starter is designed not to operate if the selector lever is in one of the driving¼ Lock all doors. 4. Warm-up positions.¼ Position seat and adjust head restraints. Always allow the engine to idle for at least Manual transmission: 30 seconds after starting. Drive at moder-¼ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. ate speed for a short distance first, espe- Move the gearshift lever to N (Neutral po-¼ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to sition), and depress the clutch pedal to the cially in cold weather. do likewise. floor while starting the engine.¼ Check the operation of warning lights when The starter is designed not to operate key is turned to the ON (3) position. unless the clutch pedal is fully de- pressed. 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. — If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather — Starting and driving 5-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • DRIVING THE VEHICLEAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is in the ACC position.The automatic transmission in your vehicle is 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and CAUTIONelectronically controlled by a transmission con- push the selector lever button to shift into atrol module to produce maximum power and driving gear. When stopping the vehicle on an uphillsmooth operation. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- then gradually start the vehicle in motion. pressing the accelerator pedal. The footShown on the following pages are the recom- brake should be used for this purpose.mended operating procedures for this trans-mission. Follow these procedures for maxi- WARNINGmum vehicle performance and drivingenjoyment. If your vehicle is equipped with four ¼ Do not depress the accelerator pedalwheel drive, see “Using four wheel drive” laterin this section. while shifting from P or N to R, D, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal¼ After starting the engine, fully depress the until shifting is completed. Failure to foot brake pedal and push the selector lever do so could cause you to lose control button before shifting the selector lever to and have an accident. the D, R, 2 or 1 position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift ¼ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use the selector lever. caution when shifting into a forwardThis automatic transmission is designed or reverse gear before the engine hasso that the foot brake pedal MUST be de- warmed up.pressed before shifting from P to any drive ¼ Never shift to P or R while the vehicleposition while the ignition switch is ON. is moving. This could cause an acci-The selector lever cannot be moved out of dent.P and into any of the other gear positions ifthe ignition key is turned to LOCK or if the ¼ On slippery roads, do not downshift.key is removed from the switch. This may cause a loss of control.When the battery charge is low, the selec-tor lever can be moved if the ignition switch5-10 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Shifting from P (Park): R (Reverse): If the ignition switch is in the ON position and Use this position to back up. Shift into this the foot brake pedal is depressed, but the position only after the vehicle has completely selector lever still cannot be moved out of P stopped. (Park), follow these instructions: N (Neutral): 1. Shut the engine off and remove the key. Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. 2. Apply the parking brake. The engine can be started in this position. You 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn it clock- may shift to N and restart a stalled engine wise to the ACC position. while the vehicle is moving. 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the selector D (Drive): lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine. Use this position for all normal forward driving. SSD0105 5. Check stop light operation. 2 (Second gear):Shifting Use for hill climbing, effective engine braking WARNING on downhill grades or starting on slipperyPush the button to shift into P, R or from D to2. All other positions can be selected without roads.pushing the button. If the selector lever cannot be moved Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds from the P (Park) position while theP (Park): over the following speeds and do not exceed engine is running and the brake pedal the following speeds in the 2 position:Use this selector position when the vehicle is depressed, the stop lights may not work.parked or when starting the engine. Always be Malfunctioning stop lights could cause Two wheel drive:sure the vehicle is at a complete stop. For an accident injuring yourself and others. 60 MPH (95 km/h)maximum safety, depress the brake pedal,then push in the select lever button and move Four wheel drive:the lever to the P position. Apply the parking These instructions for starting the vehicle in N (Part time)brake. When parking on a hill, apply the park- (Neutral) should only be used until service can 2H and 4H positions 50 MPH (80 km/h)ing brake first, then shift the lever into the P be obtained. Never drive the vehicle if the stopposition. lights are not operating properly. 4L position 19 MPH (30 km/h) Starting and driving 5-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • (All-mode) Do not exceed the following speeds in the 1 position: 2WD and AUTO positions 60 MPH (95 km/h) Two wheel drive: 4H position 50 MPH (80 km/h) 30 MPH (50 km/h) 4LO position 22 MPH (35 km/h) Four wheel drive: (Part time)1 (Low gear): 2H and 4H positions 30 MPH (50 km/h)Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow, 4L position 12 MPH (19 km/h)sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking (All-mode)on steep downhill grades. 2WD and AUTO positionsDo not shift into 1 position at speeds over the 30 MPH (50 km/h)following speeds: 4H position 30 MPH (50 km/h) Two wheel drive: 4LO position 10 MPH (15 km/h) 60 MPH (95 km/h) Four wheel drive: (Part time) 2H and 4H positions 50 MPH (80 km/h) 4L position 19 MPH (30 km/h) SSD0111 (All-mode) 2WD and AUTO positions 30 MPH (50 km/h) 4H position 30 MPH (50 km/h) 4LO position 10 MPH (15 km/h)5-12 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Shift lock release Accelerator downshiftIf the battery charge is low, the select lever — In D position —may not be moved from the P position even For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depresswith the brake pedal depressed and the select the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shiftslever button pushed. the transmission down into second gear or firstTo move the select lever, remove the shift lock gear, depending on the vehicle speed.cover using a flat-bladed screwdriver, andpush the shift lock release button and selectlever button. The select lever can be moved toN (Neutral).To push the shift lock release button, follow theprocedure as illustrated.If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) SSD0106have your NISSAN dealer check the automatictransmission system as soon as possible. Overdrive switch Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis- WARNING sion is automatically reset to overdrive on. ON: For normal driving the overdrive If the selector lever cannot be moved switch is engaged. The transmission from the P position while the engine is is upshifted into overdrive as the ve- running and the brake pedal is de- hicle speed increases. pressed, the stop lights may not work. The overdrive does not engage until the Malfunctioning stop lights could cause engine has warmed up. an accident injuring yourself and others. OFF: For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be ad- vantageous, push the overdrive switch. The O/D OFF light illuminates. Starting and driving 5-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • When cruising at a low speed or even if all electrical circuits are functioning climbing a gentle slope, you may feel properly. In this case, turn the ignition key uncomfortable shift shocks as the OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the transmission shifts between 3rd and key back to the ON position. The vehicle overdrive repeatedly. In this case, should return to its normal operating con- press the overdrive switch. The O/D dition. If it does not return to its normal OFF indicator light comes on at this operating condition have your NISSAN time. dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary.When driving conditions change, press theoverdrive switch again. The O/D OFF indicatorlight goes out.Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time with the O/D OFF SSD0107light illuminated. This reduces the fueleconomy. MANUAL TRANSMISSIONFail-safe ShiftingWhen the Fail-safe operation occurs, the nexttime the key is turned to the ON position, theO/D OFF light will blink for approximately 8 WARNINGseconds after coming on for 2 seconds. Whilethe vehicle can be driven under these circum- ¼ Do not downshift abruptly on slipperystances please note that the gears in the roads. This may cause a loss of con-automatic transmission will be locked in third trol.gear. ¼ Do not over-rev the engine whenIf the vehicle is driven under extreme con- shifting to a lower gear. This mayditions, such as excessive wheel spinning cause a loss of control or engineand subsequent hard braking, the Fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occur5-14 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MPH (km/h) Allowable maximum speed in each gear damage. 1st to 2nd 15 (24) 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) Two wheel drive models and four wheel driveTo change gears, or when up shifting or down models (2H position) MPH (km/h)shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift 3rd to 4th 40 (64) 4th to 5th 45 (72) 1st 22 (36)into the appropriate gear, then release the 2nd 37 (60)clutch slowly and smoothly. ¼ Four wheel drive model (4L position) 3rd 56 (90)Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, MPH (km/h) 4th & 5th — (—)3rd and 4th up to 5th gear in sequence accord- 1st to 2nd 8 (13)ing to the vehicle speed. 2nd to 3rd 12 (20) Four wheel drive models MPH (km/h)You cannot shift directly from 5th gear into 3rd to 4th 20 (32) 4H positionReverse. First shift into the Neutral position, 4th to 5th 22 (36) 1st 22 (36)then into Reverse. 2nd 37 (60)If it is difficult to move the shift lever into Suggested maximum speed in each 3rd 50 (80)Reverse or 1st, shift into Neutral, then release gear 4th & 5th 50 (80)the clutch pedal and shift into Reverse or 1st Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not 4L positionagain. If your vehicle is equipped with four running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. 1st 9 (15)wheel drive, see “Using four wheel drive” later 2nd 19 (30)in this section. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed 3rd 28 (45) (shown below) in any gear. For level road 4th & 5th 31 (50)Suggested up-shift speeds driving, use the highest gear suggested forThe table below provides suggested speed that speed. Always observe posted speedranges for shifting into a higher gear. These limits, and drive according to the road condi-suggestions relate to fuel economy and ve- tions which will ensure safe operation. Do not CAUTIONhicle performance. Actual shift ranges should overrev the engine when shifting to a lowerbe adjusted for specific road conditions, gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of ¼ Do not rest your foot on the clutchweather conditions and individual driving hab- vehicle control. pedal while driving. This may causeits. clutch damage.¼ Two wheel drive models and four wheel drive models (2H and 4H position) ¼ Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). Starting and driving 5-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PARKING BRAKE 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning ¼ When the vehicle is stopped for a light goes out. period of time, for example at a stop light, shift to N (Neutral) and release WARNING the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied. ¼ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. ¼ Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. ¼ Do not use the gear shift in place of PD1185M the parking brake. When parking, be To apply: pull the lever up. sure the parking brake is fully en- gaged. To release: ¼ Do not leave children unattended in a 1. Firmly apply foot brake. vehicle. They could release the park- 2. Manual transmission models: ing brake and cause an accident. Place the gearshift lever in the N (Neutral) position. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. 3. While pulling up on the lever slightly, push the button and lower completely.5-16 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CRUISE CONTROL (if soequipped) WARNING immediately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage.Do not use the cruise control when driv-ing under the following conditions: PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE¼ it is not possible to keep the vehicle CONTROL at a set speed. ¼ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it¼ in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies cancels automatically. The SET indicator in speed. light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver.¼ on winding or hilly roads. ¼ If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the¼ on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, cruise control main switch off and have the etc.) system checked by your NISSAN dealer. SSD0219¼ in very windy areas. ¼ The SET indicator light may blink when the CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS cruise control main switch is turned onDoing so could cause a loss of vehicle while pushing the RES/ACCEL, COAST/ The cruise control allows driving at a fixedcontrol and result in an accident. SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) steering wheel). To properly set the cruise without keeping your foot on the accelerator control system, perform the preceding pedal. steps in the order indicated. CAUTION To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the meter panel will come on.On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressing To set at cruising speed, accelerate yourthe clutch pedal when the cruise control vehicle to the desired speed, push theis set. Should this occur, depress the COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SETclutch pedal and turn the main switch off light will come on.) Take your foot off the Starting and driving 5-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain sion), or move the selector lever to N posi- To resume the preset speed, push and re-the set speed. tion (automatic transmission). The SET lease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle light will go out. will resume the last set cruising speed when¼ To pass another vehicle, depress the the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). accelerator pedal. When you release the To reset at a faster cruising speed, follow pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ- either of these three methods: Precautions ously set speed. a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ¼ The CRUISE indicator may sometimes¼ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed vehicle attains the desired speed, push and blink when the cruise control switch (Main when going up or down steep hills. If this release the COAST/SET switch. switch) is turned ON while pushing the happens, drive without the cruise control. RES/ACCEL switch or COAST/SET switch b) Push and hold the RES/ACCEL set switch. or CANCEL switch (located on the steeringTo cancel the preset speed, follow any of When the vehicle attains the speed you wheel). To properly set the cruise controlthese three methods: desire, release the switch. system perform the steps above in thea) Push the cancel switch; The SET light will c) Push, then quickly release the RES/ order indicated. (This is a fail-safe mode. ACCEL set switch. Each time you do this, Turn the main switch OFF and turn it ON go out. the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH again without pushing the set switch tob) Tap the brake pedal; The SET light will go (1.6 km/h). return to normal operation.) out. ¼ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it To reset at a slower cruising speed, followc) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE either of these three methods: will cancel automatically. The SET indicator indicator and SET indicator lights will go in the meter assembly will then blink to a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- warn the driver. out. hicle attains the desired speed, push the¼ If you depress the brake pedal while push- COAST/SET switch and release it. ¼ When the SET indicator blinks, turn the ing the RES/ACCEL set switch and reset at cruise control switch (Main switch) OFF and b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. have the system checked by your NISSAN the cruising speed, turn the main switch off Release the switch when the vehicle slows dealer. once and then turn it on again. down to the desired speed.¼ The cruise control will automatically be can- c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/ celled if the vehicle slows down more than SET switch. Each time you do this, the set 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6¼ Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmis- km/h).5-18 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMYDuring the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km), follow ¼ Keep your engine tuned up.these recommendations for the future reliabil- ¼ Follow the recommended periodic mainte-ity and economy of your new vehicle. nance schedule.¼ Avoid driving for long periods at constant ¼ Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres- speed, either fast or slow. sure. Low pressure will increase tire wear¼ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. and waste fuel.¼ Avoid quick starts. ¼ Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.¼ Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Improper alignment will cause increased tire wear and lower fuel economy.¼ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). ¼ Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. SD0001 ¼ When cruising at highway speeds, it is ¼ Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain more economical to use the air conditioner cruising speeds with a constant accelerator and leave the windows closed to reduce position. drag. ¼ Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. ¼ Driving at high speed will lower fuel Use 4H or 4L position only when neces- economy. sary. Four wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy. ¼ Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- hicles. ¼ Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. ¼ Avoid unnecessary engine idling. Starting and driving 5-19 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • USING PART TIME FOUR WHEELDRIVE (4WD) driven. Use when climbing or descending steep hills, or during hard driving in sand, mud ¼ Do not leave the transfer control lever or deep snow. The 4L position provides maxi- in the N position. Otherwise, the ve- mum power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle hicle could roll unexpectedly even if speed excessively, as the maximum speed is the manual transmission is in any approximately 30 MPH (50 km/h). gear or the automatic transmission in N — No wheels are driven. Always keep the the P position. If the ATP light is on, transfer lever out of the N position. Shift the this indicates that the automatic lever quickly and smoothly when moving transmission P position will not func- across the N position with the vehicle stopped. tion and the transfer lever is in neu- tral. CAUTION ¼ Failure to engage the transfer control lever in 2H, 4H or 4L could result in SSD0128 Do not drive the vehicle in 4H or 4L on the vehicle moving unexpectedly, re-2H — (2WD, high range) Only the rear wheels dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, sulting in serious personal injury orare driven. Use for driving under the same hard surfaces in 4H or 4L may cause property damage.conditions as standard 2WD vehicle, or state unnecessary noise, tire wear and in-dynamometer I/M testing. creased fuel consumption.4H — (4WD, high range) Four wheels aredriven. Use when driving on roads where it isdifficult to drive in the 2H position (i.e., drivingat normal speeds on snow covered, icy, wet, WARNINGmuddy or sandy roads). ¼ When parking the vehicle, apply theThe 4H position provides maximum powerand traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it parking brake and shift the transferwill cause loss of traction. Speed over 50 control lever in the 2H, 4H or 4LMPH (80 km/h) in 4H is not recommend. position.4L — (4WD, low range) Four wheels are5-20 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURES TO SHIFT MANUAL TRANSMISSION MODELS SHIFT PROCEDURE TRANSFER CASE: Move the transfer lever to 4H. This can be done at any speed up to 50 MPH (80 km/h), and it is not necessary to depress the clutchFrom 2H to 4H pedal. Perform this operation when driving straight. Move the transfer lever to 2H. This can be done at any speed up to 50 MPH (80 km/h), and it is not necessary to depress the clutchFrom 4H to 2H pedal. Perform this operation when driving straight. 1. Stop the vehicle.From 4H or 4L to 4L or 2. Depress the clutch pedal.4H 3. Depress the transfer lever and move it to the desired 4L or 4H position. 1. Stop the vehicle.From 2H to 4L 2. Depress the clutch pedal. 3. Depress the transfer lever and move it to 4L. Change gears quickly and smoothly. 1. Stop the vehicle.From 4L to 2H 2. Depress the clutch pedal. 3. Depress the transfer lever and move it to 2H. Starting and driving 5-21 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TO SHIFT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MODELS SHIFT PROCEDURE TRANSFER CASE: Move the transfer lever to 4H. This can be done at any speed up to 50 MPH (80 km/h), and it is not necessary to move the selector From 2H to 4H lever to the N position. Perform this operation when driving straight. Move the transfer lever to 2H. This can be done at any speed up to 50 MPH (80 km/h), and it is not necessary to move the selector From 4H to 2H lever to the N position. Perform this operation when driving straight. 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move the selector lever to the N position. From 4H or 4L to 4L or 3. Depress the transfer lever and move it to the desired 4L or 4H position. 4H When moving the transfer lever from 4H to 4L, you must always move it quickly through the N position. If you are slow to shift, the engine idle speed will allow the transfer gears to speed up and gear clashing will occur.* 1. Stop the vehicle. From 2H to 4L 2. Move the selector lever to the N position. 3. Depress the transfer lever and move it to 4L. Change gears quickly and smoothly. 1. Stop the vehicle. From 4L to 2H 2. Move the selector lever to the N position. 3. Depress the transfer lever and move it to 2H.* Do not leave the transfer lever in the N position. Stopping in the N position of the transfer case may cause gear grinding when selecting another gear. Changing the transfer case gear quickly and smoothly will eliminate this. If the transfer is left in N for longer than a few seconds and you have difficulty in selecting another gear, turn off the engine, make the gear selection and restart the engine.5-22 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • USING ALL-MODE FOUR WHEELDRIVE (4WD) the desired drive mode according to the driving CAUTION conditions. 2WD or 4WD shift procedure ¼ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads ¼ in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. ¼ in the 4LO position, stop the ve- hicle, move the automatic trans- mission lever to the N position, and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. Have your vehicle checked by an autho- rized NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESAll mode 4WD system provides 4 positions(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select Starting and driving 5-23 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SSD01815-24 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • *1: ¼ The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to WARNING ¼ When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift the 4WD shift switch after the auto- shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H matic transmission lever has been position. Do not move the 4WD shift When parking, apply the parking brake shifted to the N position. If the indicator switch when making a turn or revers- light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is ing. procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a on and the ATP warning light goes off. ¼ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while. Then the light will turn on or off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect- (between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while edly move even if the automatic trans- driving on steep downhill grades. Use ¼ Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears mission is in the P position. the engine brake. may grind, damaging the drive system. ¼ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch*2: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indica- (between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with tor light turns on when you shift the 4WD CAUTION the rear wheels spinning. shift switch to 4LO. ¼ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- ¼ Do not drive on dry hard surfaceThe transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to roads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driv-select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the tween 4LO and 4H while driving. ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOdriving conditions. There are four types of ¼ The 4H position provides greater may cause unnecessary noise anddrive modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and power and traction. Avoid excessive tire wear. We recommend driving in4LO. speed, as it will cause loss of trac- the 2WD or AUTO position underThe 4WD shift switch electronically controls tion. Speed over 50 MPH (80 km/h) in these conditions.the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch 4H is not recommend.to move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H ¼ Vehicles equipped with a limited slipand 4LO. ¼ The 4LO position provides maximum differential (LSD) have improved driv- power and traction. Avoid raising ve- ing performance on rough roads.You must push the switch in to select 4LO,and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the hicle speed excessively, as the maxi- They have increased traction perfor-automatic transmission selector lever is in mum speed is approximately 30 MPH mance, so when making a turnthe N position when changing into or out of (50 km/h).4LO. Starting and driving 5-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • chains may be effective. on paved roads, vibration and tire squealing may occur. CAUTION ¼ The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low ¼ Do not increase the tire rotation ex- ambient temperatures and the trans- cessively. Tires will sink deep into the fer 4LO position indicator light may mud, making it difficult to free the blink even when the 4WD shift switch vehicle. is shifted. After driving for a while ¼ Avoid shifting gears with the engine you can change the 4WD transfer running at high speeds as this may case between 4H and 4LO. cause malfunction.When driving on rough roads, SSD0182 4WD shift switch operations¼ Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or ¼ With the switch set to the AUTO position, 4LO. ¼ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the distribution of torque to the front and rear 2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO position, depend-¼ Drive carefully according to the road sur- wheels changes automatically, depending ing on driving conditions. face conditions. on road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) , 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This resultsWhen the vehicle is stuck, in improved driving stability.¼ Place stones or wooden blocks under the ¼ If the 4WD shift switch is operated while tires to free the vehicle. making a turn, accelerating or deceler-¼ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. ating or if the key switch is turned off while in the AUTO, 4H or 4LO, you may¼ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat feel a jerk. This is not abnormal. forward and backward movement to in- crease the movement. ¼ When the vehicle is stopped after mak- ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt after¼ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire the selector lever is shifted to N or P.5-26 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a mal- cially careful when starting or driving function. on slippery surfaces with the 4WD shift switch set in AUTO. CAUTION¼ When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO, or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or revers- ing.¼ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill SSD0141 grades. Use the engine brake. 4WD shift indicator light¼ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning. The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the tachometer.¼ Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO, The light should turn off within 1 second after ensure the vehicle speed is less than turning the ignition switch to ON. 50 MPH (80 km/h). Failure to do so While the engine is running, the 4WD shift can damage the 4WD system. indicator light will illuminate the position se- lected by the 4WD shift switch.¼ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- tween 4LO and 4H while driving. ¼ The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to¼ Engine idling speed is high while the other. When the shifting is com- warming up the engine. Be espe- pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light will come on. If the indicator light does not Starting and driving 5-27 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • come on immediately, make sure the area around the vehicle is safe, and system. If the indicator does not re- drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or turn to normal and the 4WD warning decelerate or move the vehicle in re- light comes on, have the system verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch. checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer.¼ If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator light goes out. CAUTION ¼ When the 4WD shift switch is turned to the AUTO position at low ambient temperatures, the 4WD shift indicator light may show 4H. If this happens, all four wheels are driven as torque dis- tribution is in the 4H position. Be careful as the vehicle may become difficult to turn. When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD shift indicator light should change to AUTO. ¼ If the 4WD shift indicator light indica- SSD0142A tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD 4WD warning light shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H position at low ambient tempera- The 4WD warning light is located in the meter. tures, the 2WD mode may be being If the transfer shift lever is set in the N position, engaged due to malfunctioning drive the 4WD warning light may illuminate. When5-28 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • this occurs, move the 4WD shift switch to the4H or 4LO position. idly after stopping the vehicle for a hicle, move the automatic transmis- while, have your vehicle checked by sion lever to the N position, and shiftThe 4WD warning light comes on when the an authorized NISSAN dealer as soon the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.key switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon as possible.after the engine is started. ¼ If the warning light is still on after the ¼ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not above operation, have your vehicleIf any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the key switch is ON, the warning light recommended when the 4WD warn- checked by an authorized NISSANwill either remain illuminated or blink. ing light turns on. dealer as soon as possible.If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD ¼ When the warning light comes on, the ¼ The transfer case may be damaged ifindicator light goes out. 2WD mode may be engaged even if you continue driving with the warning the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or light blinking rapidly.High-temperature transfer case oil makes the 4H. Be especially careful when driv-warning light blink rapidly (about twice per ing. If corresponding parts are mal-second). If the warning light blinks rapidly functioning, the 4WD mode will notduring operation, stop the vehicle in a safe be engaged even if the 4WD shiftplace immediately. Then if the light goes off switch is shifted.after a while, you can continue driving.A large difference between the diameters of ¼ Do not drive on dry hard surfacefront and rear wheels will make the warning roads in the 4H or 4LO position.light blink slowly (about once per two sec- If the 4WD warning light turns ononds). Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD when you are driving on dry hardand do not drive fast. surface roads CAUTION ¼ in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. ¼ If the warning light comes on or ¼ in the 4LO position, stop the ve- blinks slowly during operation or rap- Starting and driving 5-29 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the gearshift lever in the 1st position. Automatic transmission models: Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position. WARNING SSD0067 ¼ Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the the N position, otherwise, the vehicle transmission placed into the P (Park) WARNING could roll unexpectedly even if the for automatic transmission models or manual transmission is in gear or the in an appropriate gear for manual ¼ Do not stop or park the vehicle over automatic transmission is in the P transmission models. Failure to do so flammable materials, such as dry position. This could result in serious could cause the vehicle to move un- grass, waste paper, or rags. They may personal injury or property damage. expectedly or roll away and result in ignite and cause a fire. an accident. ¼ The transfer shift lever must ¼ Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. ¼ Make sure the automatic transmis- be in the 2H, 4H or 4L position and the sion selector lever has been pushed parking brake must be set to prevent ¼ Never leave children unattended in as far forward as it can go and cannot the vehicle from rolling. the vehicle. be moved without depressing the ¼ Never place the transfer shift lever in button at the end of the lever.5-30 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • POWER STEERING it is a good practice to turn the wheels as The power assisted steering is designed to Part time 4WD models: illustrated. use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. ¼ If the ATP light is ON, this indicates ¼ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: k 1 that the automatic transmission P If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will Turn the wheels into the curb and move the (park) position will not function and still have control of the vehicle. However, vehicle forward until the curb side wheel the transfer shift lever is in the N much greater steering effort is needed, espe- gently touches the curb. position. Failure to engage the trans- cially in sharp turns or at low speeds. ¼ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: k 2 fer shift lever in H or 4L could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, Turn the wheels away from the curb and WARNING resulting in serious personal injury or move the vehicle back until the curb side property damage. wheel gently touches the curb. If the engine is not running or is turned All-mode 4WD models: ¼ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO off while driving, the power assist for the CURB: k 3 steering will not work. Steering will be ¼ If the ATP light is ON, this indicates much harder to operate. Turn the wheels toward the side of the road that the automatic transmission P so the vehicle will move away from the (park) position will not function and center of the road if it moves. the transfer case is in neutral. Make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light Make sure the ATP light is off before stop- ping the engine. (and transfer 4LO position indicator) light remains illuminated before stop- 4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position ping the engine. Otherwise, the ve- and remove the key. hicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P (park) position.3. To help prevent the vehicle rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, Starting and driving 5-31 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • BRAKE SYSTEMBRAKING PRECAUTIONS To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe trol and helps to minimize swerving and spin- speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to ning on slippery surfaces.The brake system has two separate hydraulic heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakescircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at Using the systemhave braking at two wheels. high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.Vacuum assisted brakeThe brake booster aids braking by using en- WARNING WARNINGgine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stopthe vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. ¼ While driving on a slippery surface, Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing soHowever, greater foot pressure on the brake be careful when braking, accelerating may result in increased stopping dis-pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and or downshifting. Abrupt braking or tances.the stopping distance will be longer. accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.Using the brakes Normal operation ¼ If the engine is not running or isAvoid resting your foot on the brake pedal turned off while driving, the power The anti-lock brake system will not operate atwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes, assist for the brakes will not work. speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) towear out the brake linings and pads faster and completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will Braking will be harder.reduce gas mileage. vary according to road conditions.) When theTo help save the brakes and to prevent the anti-lock system senses that one or morebrakes from overheating, before going down a ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) wheels are close to locking up, the actuatorslope or long grade, reduce speed and down- (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes hydraulic pressure (like pumping the brakesshift to a lower gear. at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when very quickly). While the actuator is working,Wet brakes braking abruptly or when braking on slippery you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal surfaces. The system detects the rotation and hear a noise or vibration from the actuatorWhen the vehicle is washed or driven through speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid under the hood. This is normal and indicateswater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, pressure to prevent each wheel from locking that the anti-lock system is working properly.your braking distance will be longer and the and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the However, the pulsation may indicate that roadvehicle may pull to one side during braking. system helps the driver maintain steering con-5-32 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • conditions are hazardous and extra care isrequired while driving. WARNING specified on the tire placard. See “Tire placard” in the “9. TechnicalIf a tire slips on rough roads for more than10 seconds, the ABS brake warning light The anti-lock brake system is a sophis- and consumer information” sectionmay come on. Turn OFF the ignition key, ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac- for tire placard location information.restart the engine and drive the vehicle at cidents resulting from careless or dan-speeds above 20 MPH (30 km/h). If the gerous driving techniques. It can helpwarning light does not go out, have the maintain vehicle control during brakingvehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer. on slippery surfaces, but remember thatSelf-test feature the stopping distance on slippery sur- faces will be longer than on normalThe anti-lock brake system consists of elec- surfaces, even with the anti-lock sys-tronic sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulicsolenoids controlled by a computer. The com- tem. Stopping distances may also beputer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests longer on rough, gravel or snow coveredthe system each time you start the engine and roads, or if you are using tire chains.move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or Always maintain a safe distance fromreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the responsibility for safety of self andthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not an others rests in the hands of the driver.indication of any malfunction. If the computersenses any malfunction, it switches the anti- Tire type and condition of tires may alsolock brake system OFF and turns on the ABS affect braking effectiveness.brake warning light in the dashboard. Thebrake system will then behave normally, but ¼ When replacing tires, install thewithout anti-lock assistance. specified size of tires on all four wheels.If the light comes on during the self check, orwhile you are driving, you should take your ¼ When installing a spare tire, makevehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at sure it is the proper size and type asyour earliest convenience. Starting and driving 5-33 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • COLD WEATHER DRIVINGFREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK for Changing Engine Coolant. installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle andTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply TIRE EQUIPMENT are installed according to the chain manu-de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If facturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEthe lock becomes frozen, heat the key before 1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to provide superior performance on dry pave- Class S chains. Other types may damageinserting it into the key hole. ment. However, the performance of these your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenANTI-FREEZE tires will be substantially reduced in snowy recommended by the tire chain manufac- and icy conditions. If you operate your turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links ofIn the winter when it is anticipated that the the tire chain must be secured or removedtemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or to prevent the possibility of whipping actionanti-freeze (ethylene glycol base) to assure ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. damage to the fenders or underbody. Ifproper winter protection. For details, see “En-gine cooling system” in the “8. Maintenance Please consult your NISSAN dealer for the possible, avoid fully loading your vehicleand do-it-yourself” section. tire type, size, speed rating and availability when using tire chains. In addition, drive at information. a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicleBATTERY may be damaged and/or vehicle handling 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded and performance may be adversely af-If the battery is not fully charged during ex- tires may be used. However, some Prov-tremely cold weather conditions, the battery fected. inces and States prohibit their use, so,fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To Do not use the chains on dry roads. before installing studded tires, check local,maintain maximum efficiency, the battery state and provincial laws. Tire chains must be installed only on theshould be checked regularly. For details, see rear wheels and not on the front wheels.“Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it- Skid and traction capabilities of studdedyourself” section. snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. which are clear of snow. Driving with chainsDRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. TIRE CHAINS may be used if desired. in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due toIf the vehicle is to be left outside without Make sure they are of proper size for the some overstress. When driving on clearanti-freeze, drain the cooling system by open- tires on your vehicle and are installed ac- paved roads, be sure to change to 2WD.ing the drain valves located under the radiator cording to the chain manufacturer’s sug-and on the engine block. Refill before operat- gestions. Use of tire chains may be prohib- 4. For four wheel drive:ing the vehicle. See “Engine cooling system” in ited according to location. Check the local If you install snow tires, they must also bethe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section laws before installing tire chains. When the same size, brand, construction and5-34 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • tread pattern on all four wheels. very cold snow or ice can be slick and ¼ Do not use cruise control on slippery very hard to drive on. The vehicle will roads. CAUTION have a lot less traction or grip under ¼ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust these conditions. Try to avoid driving ONLY use spare tires specified for each gases under your vehicle. Keep snow on wet ice until the road is salted or four wheel drive model. clear of the exhaust pipe and from sanded. around your vehicle. ¼ Whatever the condition, drive withSPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or down- ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soIt is recommended that the following items be equipped) shifting too fast, the drive wheels willcarried in the vehicle during winter: lose even more traction. An engine block heater to assist extreme cold¼ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ¼ Allow more stopping distance under temperature starting is available through your ice and snow from the windows and wiper NISSAN dealer. blades. these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.¼ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the WARNING jack to give it firm support. ¼ Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.¼ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- Do not use your heater with an un- drifts. ¼ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). grounded electrical system or two-¼ Extra window washer fluid to refill the res- These may appear on an otherwise pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be ervoir tank. clear road in shaded areas. If a patch injured by an electrical shock if you use of ice is seen ahead, brake before an ungrounded connection.DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any WARNING sudden steering maneuvers. ¼ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), Starting and driving 5-35 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO5-36 Starting and driving ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 6 In case of emergencyFlat tire ...................................................................... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats ......................................... 6-11 Changing a flat tire ............................................... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ................................................ 6-12Jump starting............................................................. 6-9 Towing recommended by Nissan....................... 6-13Push starting ........................................................... 6-10 Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ........ 6-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FLAT TIRECHANGING A FLAT TIRE All-mode 4WD models: This is hazardous.If you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow. ¼ Make sure the 4WD shift indicator ¼ Never change tires if oncoming traffic and/or transfer 4LO position indicator is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-Stopping the vehicle light remains illuminated before stop- fessional road assistance.1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away ping the engine. from traffic. ¼ Make sure the ATP light is off before 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to2. Turn on the hazard warning flasher. stopping the engine. Otherwise, the signal professional road assistance person- vehicle could roll unexpectedly even nel that you need help.3. Park on a level surface and apply the if the automatic transmission is in the 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle parking brake. Shift the manual transmis- P position. This could result in seri- and stand in a safe place away from traffic sion into reverse (automatic transmission in ous personal injury or property dam- and clear of the vehicle. P). age. WARNING 4. Turn off the engine. ¼ The transfer control lever must be in the 2H, 4H or 4L position. WARNING ¼ Never place the transfer control lever ¼ Make sure that the parking brake is in the N position. Otherwise, the ve- securely applied and the manual hicle could roll unexpectedly even if transmission is shifted into R (re- the manual transmission is in gear or verse), on the automatic transmis- the automatic transmission is in the P sion in P (Park). position. This could result in serious personal injury or property damage. ¼ Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or a slippery area.6-2 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MCE0001 SCE0339C SCE0120Blocking wheels Getting the spare tire and toolsPlace suitable blocks at both the front and Remove jacking tools and spare tire fromback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat storage area.tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it isjacked up. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and could cause personal injury. In case of emergency 6-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SCE0377 SCE0326 CAUTION ¼ Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown. SCE0116B ¼ Make sure the rod tip fits in the fitting portion of the spare tire hanger and turn the rod. ¼ Be sure to center the spare tire sus- pending plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire. SCE03276-4 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SCE0139C SCE0338CRemoving wheel cap Jacking up the vehicle and removing during a tire change. the damaged tire CAUTION ¼ Use the correct jack up points; never WARNING use any other part of the vehicle for Do not use your hands to pry off wheel jack support. caps. Doing so could result in personal ¼ Never get under the vehicle while it is ¼ Never jack up the vehicle more than injury. supported only by the jack. necessary. ¼ Use only the jack provided with your ¼ Never use blocks on or under the vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use jack. the jack provided with your vehicle ¼ Do not start or run engine while ve- on other vehicles. The jack is de- hicle is on the jack, as it may cause signed only for lifting your vehicle In case of emergency 6-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • the vehicle to move. This is especially WARNING true for vehicle with limited slip dif- ferential carriers. ¼ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly ¼ Do not allow passengers to stay in tightened wheel nuts can cause the the vehicle while it is on the jack. wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.Carefully read the following instructions. ¼ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up nuts to become loose. point. The jack should be used on level firm ground. As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts SCE0122 to the specified torque with a torque2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by wrench. turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut Installing the spare tire wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface 98 ft-lb (133 N⋅m)Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire between the wheel and hub.is off the ground. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. 2. Carefully put the wheel on and tighten the3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire wheel nuts finger tight. COLD pressure: clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, se- After vehicle has been parked for three curely hold the jack lever and rod with both 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel hours or more or driven less than 1 mile hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts alternately and evenly until they are (1.6 km). nuts, and then remove the wheel. Do not tight. remove the brake drum with the wheel. COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire placard affixed to the glove box lid. touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated.6-6 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING for emergency use. See “Tires and wheels” in the “8. Maintenance and Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- do-it-yourself” section. hicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).5. Securely store the spare tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle. SCE0339C Stowing the damaged tire and tools Securely store the tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle as illustrated. WARNING ¼ Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. ¼ The small size spare tire is designed In case of emergency 6-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • designed to be inserted at an angle as shown. When stowing the 17 inch wheel, remove the cap pushing it from the inside of the wheel. SCE0244Tightening torque of nuts: 48 to 66 ft-lb (66 to 89 N⋅m) Use a suitable padlock. SCE0245 CAUTION Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is6-8 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • JUMP STARTINGIf you try to start your engine with a boosterbattery, follow the instructions and precautions 12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbelow: battery can damage your vehicle. ¼ Whenever working on or near a bat- WARNING tery, always wear suitable eye protec- tors (for example, goggles or indus- ¼ If done incorrectly, jump starting can trial safety spectacles) and remove lead to a battery explosion, resulting rings, metal bands, or any other metal in severe injury or death. It could also jewelry. Do not lean over battery damage your vehicle. when jump starting. ¼ Explosive hydrogen gas is always ¼ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen present in the vicinity of the battery. battery. It could explode and cause Keep all sparks and flames away from serious injury. SCE0149 it. ¼ Your vehicle has an automatic engine ¼ Do not allow battery fluid to come cooling fan. It could come on at any WARNING into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or time. Keep hands and other objects painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a away from it. Always follow the instructions below. corrosive sulphuric acid solution Failure to do so could result in damage which can cause severe burns. If the to the charging system and cause per- fluid should come into contact with sonal injury. anything, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water. 1. Position the two vehicles to bring their ¼ Keep battery out of the reach of chil- batteries into close proximity to each other dren. if the booster battery is in another vehicle. ¼ The booster battery must be rated at Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply parking brakes. Move the shift lever In case of emergency 6-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PUSH STARTING to Neutral position (On automatic transmis- at about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in sion models, move the selector lever to P the normal manner. CAUTION (Park)). Switch off all unnecessary electri- cal systems (light, heater, air conditioner, CAUTION ¼ Automatic transmission models can- etc.). not be push started. This may cause3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so Do not keep starter motor engaged for transmission damage. equipped). Cover the battery with an old more than 10 seconds. If the engine ¼ Three way catalyst equipped models cloth to reduce explosion hazard. does not start right away, turn the key should not be started by pushing4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying since the three way catalyst may be illustrated. again. damaged. ¼ Never try to start the vehicle by tow- CAUTION 7. After starting your engine, carefully discon- ing it; when the engine starts, the nect the negative cable and then the posi- forward surge could cause the ve- tive cable. ¼ Always connect positive (+) to posi- hicle to collide with the tow vehicle. tive (+) and negative (−) to body 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be ground, (for example, strut mounting sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover bolt, engine lift bracket, etc. — not to the vent holes as it may be contaminated the battery). with corrosive acid. ¼ Make sure that cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compart- ment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle6-10 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATSIf your vehicle is overheating indicated by an tioner temperature control to maximum hotextremely high temperature gauge reading, or and fan control to high speed. WARNINGif you feel a lack of engine power, detect 3. If engine overheating is caused by climbingabnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a ¼ Be careful not to allow your hands, fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the hair, jewelry or clothing to come into WARNING temperature gauge indication returns to contact with, or to get caught in, the normal. cooling fan, or drive belt. ¼ Do not continue to drive if your ve- 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for ¼ The engine cooling fan can start at hicle overheats. Doing so could steam or coolant escaping from the radiator any time when the coolant tempera- cause a vehicle fire. before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before pro- ture is high. ¼ To avoid the danger of being scalded, ceeding. never remove the radiator cap while 7. After the engine cools down, check the 5. Open the engine hood. the engine is still hot. When the radia- coolant level in the reservoir tank with the tor cap is removed, pressurized hot engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir water will spurt out, possibly causing WARNING tank if necessary. Have your vehicle re- serious injury. paired at the nearest NISSAN dealer. If steam or water is coming from the ¼ Do not open the hood if steam is engine, stand clear to prevent getting coming out. burned.1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply 6. Visually check drive belts for damage or the parking brake and move the gearshift looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is lever to the neutral position (automatic running. The radiator hoses and radiator transmission to P (Park)). should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, Do not stop the engine. the cooling fan belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run, stop the2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all engine. the windows, move the heater or air condi- In case of emergency 6-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TOWING YOUR VEHICLEWhen towing your vehicle, all State (Provincialin Canada) and local regulations for towing tion. If any unit is damaged, dolliesmust be followed. Incorrect towing equipment must be used.could damage your vehicle. Towing instruc- ¼ Always attach safety chains beforetions are available from your NISSAN dealer. towing.Local service operators are generally familiarwith the applicable laws and procedures fortowing. To assure proper towing and to pre-vent accidental damage to your vehicle,NISSAN recommends having a service opera-tor tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have theservice operator carefully read the followingprecautions: SCE0196 WARNING ¼ Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. ¼ Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. CAUTION ¼ When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condi-6-12 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TOWING RECOMMENDED BY wheel in a straightahead position NISSAN with a rope or similar device. Never Two wheel drive models secure the steering wheel by turn- ing the ignition key to the LOCK NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be position. This may damage the towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the steering lock mechanism. ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. ¼ If you have to tow manual transmis- sion models with the rear wheels on CAUTION the ground or four wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing ¼ Never tow automatic transmission dollies): models with the rear wheels on the ¼ Always release the parking brake. ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may ¼ Move the transmission shift lever cause serious and expensive damage to the N (Neutral) position. to the transmission. If it is necessary ¼ Observe the following restricted tow- to tow the vehicle with the front ing speeds and distances for manual wheels raised, always use towing dol- transmission models only: lies under the rear wheels. ¼ Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)SCE0197A ¼ When towing automatic or manual ¼ Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 transmission models with the front km) wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: If the speed or distance must necessarily be ¼ Turn the ignition key to the OFF greater, remove the propeller shaft before tow- position, and secure the steering ing to prevent damage to the transmission. In case of emergency 6-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CAUTION ¼ If you have to tow manual transmis- sion models with the rear wheels on ¼ Never tow automatic transmission the ground (if you do not use towing models with the rear wheels on the dollies) or four wheels on the ground: ground or four wheels on the ground, ¼ Move the transfer case shift lever as this may cause serious and expen- to the 2H position. sive damage to the transmission. If it ¼ Move the transmission shift lever is necessary to tow the vehicle with to the N (Neutral) position. the front wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the rear wheels. ¼ Always release the parking brake. ¼ When towing automatic or manual ¼ Observe the following restricted tow- transmission models with the front ing speeds and distances manual wheels on the ground or on towing transmission models only: dollies: ¼ Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h) ¼ Move the transfer case shift lever ¼ Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 to the 2H position. km) ¼ Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering If the speed or distance must necessarily be SCE0198 wheel in a straight ahead position greater, remove the front and rear propeller with a rope or similar device. Never shafts before towing to prevent damage to thePart time four wheel drive models secure the steering wheel by turn- transmission.NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be ing the ignition key to the LOCKused when towing your vehicle or the vehicle position. This may damage thebe placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated. steering lock mechanism.6-14 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SCE0328 SCE0322All-mode four wheel drive models VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a age to the transfer case. stuck vehicle)NISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or the vehicle ¼ Use the towing hook only, not other parts ofbe placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated. the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. CAUTION ¼ Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow Never tow All-mode 4WD models with the vehicle for a long distance using only any of the wheels on the ground as this the towing hook. may cause serious and expensive dam In case of emergency 6-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • vehicle could also overheat and be dam- aged. SCE0138¼ The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.¼ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. WARNING Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your6-16 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO In case of emergency 6-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO6-18 In case of emergency ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 7 Appearance and careCleaning exterior ....................................................... 7-2 Cleaning interior ........................................................ 7-3 Washing................................................................ 7-2 Floor mats ............................................................ 7-4 Waxing.................................................................. 7-2 Seat belts ............................................................. 7-4 Removing spots.................................................... 7-3 Corrosion protection .................................................. 7-4 Underbody ............................................................ 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle Glass .................................................................... 7-3 corrosion............................................................... 7-4 Aluminum alloy wheels......................................... 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ................ 7-5 Chrome parts........................................................ 7-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CLEANING EXTERIOR Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. ¼ Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care When it is necessary to park outside, park in a must be taken when removing shady area or protect the vehicle with a body caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- cover. stance so that the paint surface is not Be careful not to scratch the paint surface scratched or damaged. when putting on or removing the body cover. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of WASHING clean water. Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a hatches and hood are particularly endangered MAI0001 mild soap such as Nissan Car Wash, or a by the effects of road salt. Therefore, these general purpose dish-washing liquid mixed areas must be regularly cleaned. Take careIn order to maintain the appearance of your with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. that the drain holes in the lower edge of thevehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. door are open. Spray water under the bodyIn the following cases, please wash your ve- CAUTION and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt andhicle as soon as possible to protect the paint wash away road salt.surface. ¼ Do not use strong household soap, A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.¼ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage strong chemical detergents, gasoline from acid rain or solvents. WAXING¼ After driving on coastal roads ¼ Do not wash the vehicle in direct Regular waxing protects the paintwork and sunlight or while the vehicle body is keeps the finish. After waxing, polishing is¼ When contaminants such as soot, bird hot, as the surface may become recommended to remove built-up residue and droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs water-spotted. avoid a “weathered” appearance. get on the paint surface Your NISSAN dealer can assist you in choos-¼ When dust or mud builds up on the surface ing the proper product.7-2 Appearance and care ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CLEANING INTERIOR¼ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough again in the spring, the underseal must be Occasionally remove loose dust from the inte- washing. Follow the instructions supplied checked and, if necessary, re-treated. rior trim, plastic parts and seats using a with the wax. vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl GLASS and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth¼ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust cutting compounds or cleaners that may clean with a dry soft cloth. Before using any film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for damage the vehicle finish. fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s rec- glass to be coated with a film after the vehicle¼ If the surface does not polish easily, use a is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a ommendations. Some fabric protectors con- road tar remover and wax again. soft cloth will easily remove this film. tains chemicals that stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only withMachine compounding or aggressive pol- water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish CAUTIONmay dull the finish or leave swirl marks. CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the window,Only apply black wax or black shoe polish to do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivethe black urethane or polypropylene bumper. ¼ Never use gasoline, thinner or any cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant similar material.REMOVING SPOTS cleaners. They could damage the elec- trical conductors, radio antenna ele- ¼ The leather seats should be regularlyRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, in- ments or rear window defogger ele- coated with a leather wax like saddlesects and tree sap as quickly as possible from ments. soap. Never use car wax.the surface of the paint to avoid lasting dam-age or staining. Special cleaning products are ¼ Never use fabric protectors unlessavailable at your NISSAN dealer or any auto- ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS recommended by the manufacturer.motive accessories store. Wash regularly, especially during winter ¼ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onUNDERBODY months in areas where road salt is used. Salt meter or gauge lens covers. It mayIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it is could discolor the wheel if not removed. damage the lens cover.necessary to clean the underbody regularly in CHROME PARTSorder to prevent dirt and salt from building upand causing corrosion on the underbody and Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-suspension. Before the winter period and abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. Appearance and care 7-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CORROSION PROTECTION Floor mat positioning aid MOST COMMON FACTORS (Driver side only) CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE This model includes a front floor mat bracket to CORROSION act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor 1. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt mats have been specially designed for your and debris in body panel sections, cavities, vehicle model. The driver side floor mat has a and other areas. grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply posi- tion the mat by placing the floor mat bracket 2. Damage to paint and other protective coat- through the floor mat grommet hole while ings caused by gravel and stone chips or centering the mat in the floorpan contour. minor traffic accidents. Periodically check to make certain the mats Moisture are properly positioned. The accumulation of sand, dirt and water on SAI0009 SEAT BELTS the underside of the body will accelerate cor- rosion. Floor sections which have snow andFLOOR MATS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them ice trapped under the floor matting will not dry. with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solu-The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can tion. Allow the belts to dry completely before Relative humidityextend the life of your vehicle carpet and make using them.it easier to clean the interior. No matter what Corrosion will be accelerated:mats are used, be sure they are fitted for ¼ in areas of high relative humidityyour vehicle and are properly positioned in WARNINGthe footwell to prevent interference with ¼ especially in areas where the temperaturespedal operation. Mats should be maintained Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the stay above freezingwith regular cleaning and replaced if they retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or ¼ where atmospheric pollution existsbecome excessively worn. chemical solvents since these may se- ¼ where road salt is used verely weaken the seat belt webbing.7-4 Appearance and care ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TemperatureA temperature increase will accelerate the rate CAUTIONof corrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated. ¼ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compart-Air pollution ment by washing it out with a hose.Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner orair in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will broom.accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt ¼ Never allow water or other liquids towill also accelerate the disintegration of paintsurfaces. come in contact with electronic com- ponents inside the vehicle as thisTO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE may damage them.FROM CORROSION¼ Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are the vehicle clean. extremely corrosive and will accelerate corro-¼ Always check for minor damage to the paint sion and the deterioration of underbody com- and repair it as soon as possible. ponents such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fend-¼ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors ers. and tailgate open to avoid water accumula- tion. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.¼ Check the underbody. If any sand, dirt or salt is accumulated, wash it off with water For additional protection against rust and cor- as soon as possible. rosion, which may be required in some areas, consult your local NISSAN dealer. Appearance and care 7-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO7-6 Appearance and care ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourselfMaintenance requirements........................................ 8-2 Spark plugs ............................................................. 8-23General maintenance ................................................ 8-2 Replacing spark plugs ........................................ 8-23 Explanation of general maintenance items .......... 8-2 Air cleaner ............................................................... 8-23 Interior maintenance............................................. 8-3 Windshield wiper blades ......................................... 8-24Maintenance precautions .......................................... 8-5 Cleaning ............................................................. 8-24Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-7 Replacing............................................................ 8-24Engine cooling system .............................................. 8-9 Parking brake and brake pedal............................... 8-25 Checking engine coolant level ............................. 8-9 Checking parking brake ..................................... 8-25 Changing engine coolant ................................... 8-10 Checking brake pedal ........................................ 8-26Engine oil ................................................................ 8-13 Brake booster ..................................................... 8-26 Checking engine oil level ................................... 8-13 Clutch pedal ............................................................ 8-27 Changing engine oil ........................................... 8-14 Checking clutch pedal ........................................ 8-27 Changing engine oil filter ................................... 8-15 Fuses....................................................................... 8-27Automatic transmission fluid ................................... 8-16 Engine compartment .......................................... 8-27 Temperature conditions for checking ................. 8-17 Passenger compartment .................................... 8-28Power steering fluid ................................................ 8-18 Keyfob battery replacement ............................... 8-29Brake and clutch fluid ............................................. 8-18 Lights....................................................................... 8-30 Brake fluid .......................................................... 8-18 Headlights........................................................... 8-31 Clutch fluid.......................................................... 8-19 Wheels and tires ..................................................... 8-34Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-20 Tire pressure ...................................................... 8-34 Window washer fluid reservoir ........................... 8-20 Types of tires...................................................... 8-35Battery ..................................................................... 8-21 Tire chains .......................................................... 8-36 Jump starting ...................................................... 8-21 Changing wheels and tires................................. 8-37Drive belts ............................................................... 8-22 Clutch housing drain............................... 8-40 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCEYour new NISSAN has been designed to have Performing general maintenance checks re- During the normal day-to-day operation of theminimum maintenance requirements with quire minimal mechanical skill and only a few vehicle, general maintenance should be per-longer service intervals to save you both time general automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section.and money. However, some day-to-day and If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or These checks or inspections can be done byregular maintenance is essential to maintain smell, be sure to check for the cause or have yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer,your NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as your NISSAN dealer check it promptly. In your NISSAN dealer.well as its emission and engine performance. addition, you should notify your NISSAN Where to go for service: dealer if you think that repairs are required.It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethat scheduled maintenance, as well as gen- If maintenance service is required or your When performing any checks or maintenanceeral maintenance, is performed. vehicle appears to malfunction, have the sys- work, closely observe the “Maintenance pre- tems checked and tuned by an authorized cautions” later in this section.As the vehicle owner, you are the only one NISSAN dealer.who can ensure that your vehicle receives the EXPLANATION OF GENERALproper maintenance care. You are a vital link NISSAN technicians are well-trained special- MAINTENANCE ITEMSin the maintenance chain. ists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, Additional information on the followingScheduled maintenance: service tips, and in-dealership training pro- items with “*” is found later in this section.For your convenience, both required and op- grams. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your Outside the vehicletional scheduled maintenance items are de-scribed and listed in your “Service and Main- vehicle, rather than after they have worked on The maintenance items listed here should betenance Guide”. You must refer to that guide to it. performed from time to time, unless otherwiseensure that necessary maintenance is per- You can be confident that your NISSAN deal- specified.formed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. er’s service department performs the best job Tires*:General maintenance: to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle — in a reliable and economic way. Check the pressure with a gauge at least onceGeneral maintenance includes those items a month and always prior to long distancewhich should be checked during normal day- trips, including the spare, and adjust to theto-day operation of the vehicle. They are es- specified pressure if necessary. Check care-sential if your vehicle is to continue to operate fully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.properly. It is your responsibility to performthese procedures regularly as prescribed.8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Wheel nuts*: Windshield wiper blades*: Warning lights and chimes:When checking the tires, make sure no nuts Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe Make sure that all warning lights and chimesare missing, and check for any loose nuts. properly. are operating properly.Tighten if necessary. Doors and engine hood: Windshield wiper and washer*:Tire rotation*: Check that all doors and the engine hood, Check that the wipers and washer operateTires should be rotated every 7,500 miles operate properly. Also ensure that all latches properly and that the wipers do not streak.(12,000 km). However, the timing for tire rota- lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, rollerstion may vary according to your driving habits Windshield defroster: and links if necessary. Make sure that theand road surface conditions. secondary latch keeps the hood from opening Check that the air comes out of the defrosterWheel alignment and balance: when the primary latch is released. outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.If the vehicle should pull to either side while When driving in areas using road salt or otherdriving on a straight and level road, or if you corrosive materials, check lubrication fre- Steering wheel:detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there quently. Check for changes in the steering conditions,may be a need for wheel alignment. Inside the vehicle such as excessive freeplay, hard steering orIf the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal strange noises.highway speeds, wheel balancing may be Lights*: Seats:needed. Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, Check seat position controls such as seatFor additional information regarding tires, refer turn signal lights, and other lights are all oper- adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensureto “Important Tire Safety Information” in the ating properly and installed securely. Also they operate smoothly and that all latches lockWarranty Information Booklet (US) or “Tire securely in every position. Check that the headSafety Information” in the Warranty Informa- check headlight aim. restraints move up and down smoothly andtion booklet (Canada). INTERIOR MAINTENANCE that the locks (if so equipped) hold securely inWindshield: Clean the windshield on a regu- all latched positions.lar basis. Check the windshield at least every The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when Seat belts:six months for cracks or other damage. Have adamaged windshield repaired by a qualified performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the Check that all parts of the seat belt systemrepair facility. vehicle, etc. (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retrac- Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • tors) operate properly and smoothly, and are Automatic transmission P (Park) position Automatic transmission fluid level*:installed securely. Check the belt webbing for mechanism: Check the level after putting the selector levercuts, fraying, wear or damage. On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is in P (Park) with the engine idling.Accelerator pedal: held securely with the selector lever in the P position without applying any brakes. Engine coolant level*:Check the pedal for smooth operation and Check the coolant level when the engine ismake sure the pedal does not catch or require Under the hood and vehicle cold.uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from The maintenance items listed here should bethe pedal. Radiator and hoses: checked periodically e.g. each time you checkClutch pedal*: the engine oil or refuel. Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may haveMake sure the pedal operates smoothly and Windshield washer fluid*: accumulated. Make sure the hoses have nocheck that it has the proper free travel. Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.Brakes: Engine oil level*: Engine drive belts*:Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to Check the level after parking the vehicle on a Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, crackedone side when applied. level spot and turning off the engine. (Be sure or oily. to wait a few minutes to allow the oil to drainBrake pedal and booster*: Battery*: back into the sump.)Check the pedal for smooth operation and Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be Brake and clutch fluid levels*:make sure it has the proper distance under it between the MAX and MIN lines.when depressed fully. Check the brake Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level Vehicles operated in high temperatures orbooster function. Be certain to keep floormats is between the MAX and MIN lines on the under severe conditions require frequentaway from the pedal. reservoir. checks of the battery fluid level.Parking brake*: Power steering fluid level* and lines: Exhaust system:Check that the lever has the proper travel and Check the level when the fluid is cold and the Make sure there are no loose supports, cracksconfirm that your vehicle is held securely on a engine is turned off. Check the lines for proper or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.fairly steep hill with only the parking brake unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes,applied. immediately locate the trouble and correct it.8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONSSee “Precautions when starting and driving” in When performing any inspection or mainte-the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust nance work on your vehicle, always take care such as rings, watches, etc. beforegas (carbon monoxide). to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself working on your vehicle. or damage to the vehicle. The following areUnderbody: ¼ Always wear eye protection when- general precautions which should be closelyThe underbody is frequently exposed to corro- ever you work on your vehicle. observed.sive substances such as those used on icy ¼ If you must run the engine in anroads or to control dust. It is very important to enclosed space such as a garage, beremove these substances, otherwise rust will WARNING sure there is proper ventilation forform on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines andaround the exhaust system. At the end of ¼ Park the vehicle on a level surface, exhaust gases to escape.winter, the underbody should be thoroughly apply the parking brake securely and ¼ Never get under the vehicle while it isflushed with plain water, being careful to clean block the wheels to prevent the ve- supported only by a jack. If it is nec-those areas where mud and dirt may accumu- hicle from moving. For a manual essary to work under the vehicle,late. For additional information, see “Cleaning transmission, move the shift lever to support it with safety stands.exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care” sec-tion. Neutral. For an automatic transmis- ¼ Keep smoking materials, flame and sion, move the selector lever to the PFluid leaks: sparks away from fuel and battery. (Park) position.Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or ¼ Your vehicle is equipped with an au- ¼ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFFother fluid leaks after the vehicle has been tomatic engine cooling fan. It may or LOCK position when performingparked for a while. Water dripping from the air come on at any time without warning,conditioner after use is normal. If you should any replacement or repair. even if the ignition key is in the OFFnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are ¼ If you must work with the engine position and the engine is not run-evident, check for the cause and have it cor- running, keep your hands, clothing, ning. To avoid injury, always discon-rected immediately. hair and tools away from moving fans nect the negative battery cable before belts and any other moving parts. working near the fan. ¼ It is advisable to secure or remove ¼ On gasoline engine models with the any loose clothing and any jewelry, Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, ronment. Always conform to local the fuel filter or fuel lines should be regulations for disposal of vehicle serviced by a NISSAN dealer because fluid. the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. This section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. More involved service CAUTION should be done by your NISSAN dealer. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also ¼ Do not work under the engine hood available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service while it is hot. Turn off the engine and Manual order information” in the “9. Technical wait until it cools down. and consumer information” section. ¼ Never connect or disconnect either You should be aware that incomplete or im- proper servicing may result in operating diffi- the battery or any transistorized com- culties or excessive emissions, and could af- ponent connector while the ignition fect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about key is on. any servicing, have it done by your NISSAN ¼ Never leave the engine or the auto- dealer. matic transmission related compo- nent harness connector discon- nected while the ignition key is on. ¼ Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the envi-8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONSVQ35DE engine SDI1127 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • VG33E engine SDI0418A8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ENGINE COOLING SYSTEMThe engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round, anti- WARNINGfreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solu-tion contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, ¼ Never remove the radiator cap whentherefore additional cooling system additivesare not necessary. the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait CAUTION until the engine and radiator cool down. See “If your vehicle overheats” When adding or replacing the coolant, in the “6. In case of emergency” sec- be sure to use only a genuine NISSAN tion. anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- ¼ The radiator is equipped with a pres- freeze and 50% demineralized water/ sure cap. To prevent engine damage, SDI0378 distilled water. The use of other types of use only a genuine NISSAN radiator coolant solutions may damage your en- cap. CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT gine cooling system. LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank Deminer- when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is Outside tempera- below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX ture down to alized Anti- level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the water or freeze coolant level in the radiator when the engine distilled °C °F water is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the −35 −30 50% 50% filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level. If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ¼ Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets. SDI0485 SDI0486ACHANGING ENGINE COOLANT¼ Major cooling system repairs should be WARNING performed by your NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the ¼ To avoid the danger of being scalded, appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. never change the coolant when the engine is hot.¼ Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ¼ Never remove the radiator cap when ing. the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ¼ Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 1. Perform the following procedure to open the heater water cock. ¼ Turn the ignition key from OFF to ON. ¼ Move the heater or air conditioner tem- perature control dial to the maximum hot position then turn the ignition key to OFF. 2. Open the radiator drain plugs and radiator cap. Open the drain plugs on the engine block.SDI1109 SDI0409ASDI1118 SDI0410A Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ture of coolant and water. Fill the reservoir tank slowly up to the MAX level. Then install the radiator cap and close the air release plug(s). 7. Start the engine and warm it up until it reaches normal operating temperature. Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under no load. Watch the coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating. 8. Stop the engine. After it completely cools down, refill the radiator up to the filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up the MAX SDI1110 SDI0419 level. 3. Open the air release plug(s) to drain the 9. Check the radiator drain plug and engine coolant. block drain plugs for any sign of leakage. 4. Flush the cooling system by running fresh water through the radiator. ¼ Waste coolant must be disposed of properly. ¼ Check your local regulations. 5. Close the radiator drain plugs and engine block drain plugs securely. 6. See the “9. Technical and consumer infor- mation” section for cooling system capacity. SDI1189 Fill the radiator slowly with the proper mix-8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ENGINE OIL SDI1114 SDI0420 SDI1141CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL marks.If the oil level is below the L mark,1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and remove the oil filler cap and pour recom- CAUTION mended oil through the opening. Do not apply the parking brake. overfill. Oil level should be checked regularly.2. Run the engine until it reaches operating 6. Recheck oil level with dipstick. Operating with insufficient amount of oil temperature. It is normal to add some oil between oil can damage the engine, and such dam-3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 changes or during the break-in period, de- age is not covered by warranty. minutes for the oil to drain back into the pending on the severity of operating con- oil pan. ditions.4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H and L Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SDI0487A SDI1112 SDI0416 CHANGING ENGINE OIL If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See later in this 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and section for changing engine oil filter. apply the parking brake. 2. Warm up the engine until it reaches oper- CAUTION ating temperature, and then turn it off and wait more than 10 minutes. Be careful not to burn yourself, as the 3. Place a large drain pan under the drain engine oil is hot. plug. 4. Remove the oil filler cap. ¼ Waste oil must be disposed of prop- 5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and erly. completely drain the oil. ¼ Check your local regulations. 6. Clean and re-install the drain plug and new8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. used engine oil may cause skin can- cer. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N⋅m) ¼ Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash7. Refill engine with recommended oil through thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely. as soon as possible. See “Capacities and recommended ¼ Keep used engine oil out of reach of fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and children. consumer information” section for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the SDI1113 oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER proper amount of oil is in the engine. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug. 2. Turn the engine off. Correct as required. 3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 (Depending on the engine model, a special minutes. Check the oil level with the dip- cap-type wrench may be required. See your stick. Add engine oil if necessary. NISSAN dealer.) Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. WARNING ¼ Prolonged and repeated contact with Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID 6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 10.85 to 15.12 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.5 N⋅m) 7. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 8. Turn the engine off and wait several min- utes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. SDI0417 SDI1120 CAUTION WARNING Be careful not to burn yourself, as the ¼ When engine is running, keep hands, engine oil may be hot. jewelry, and clothing away from any moving parts such as fan and drive belt.4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag. ¼ Automatic transmission fluid is poi- sonous and should be stored care- Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the fully in marked containers out of the engine. reach of children.5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with engine oil.8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. may also be used. Outside the conti- nental US and Alaska contact a 2. Start the engine and then move the selector NISSAN dealer for more information lever through each gear range, ending in P. regarding suitable fluids, including 3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. recommended brand(s) of DexronTM 4. Expand the spring stopper and remove the III/MerconTM automatic transmission dipstick. Wipe it clean with lint-free paper. fluid. 5. Re-insert the dipstick into the charging pipe as far as it will go. If the vehicle has been driven for a long time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot 6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. weather, or if it is being used to pull a If the level is on the low side of either range, trailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu- SDI0488 rately. You should wait until the fluid has add fluid to the charging pipe. cooled down (about 30 minutes).TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS 7. When inserting the dipstick, set it so thatFOR CHECKING the spring stopper presses the upper part of the dipstick rubber to lock the dipstick.The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range (L & H marks) on the dipstick atfluid temperatures between 122 and 176°F (50 CAUTIONand 80°C) after the vehicle has been drivenapproximately 5 minutes in urban areas after ¼ Do not overfill.the engine is warmed up. The level can bechecked at fluid temperatures between 86 and ¼ Use only Nissan Matic D (Continental122°F (30 and 50°C) using the COLD range on U.S. and Alaska) or Canada Nissanthe dipstick for reference, after the engine is automatic transmission fluid.warmed up but before driving. However, the DexronTMIII/MerconTM or equivalentfluid level must be rechecked using the HOTrange. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID SDI1209 DI0187M SDI0847 Check the fluid level. BRAKE FLUID The fluid level should be checked using the Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid HOT range on the dipstick at fluid tempera- level is below the MIN. line or the brake tures of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the warning light comes on, add Genuine Nissan COLD range on the dipstick at fluid tempera- Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the tures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C). MAX. line. If fluid is added frequently, the system should CAUTION be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer. ¼ Do not overfill. ¼ Use Genuine Nissan PSF II or equiva- lent. SDI0386B8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING WARNINGUse only new fluid from a sealed con- Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake and clutch sys- may damage the brake and clutch sys-tems. The use of improper fluids can tems. The use of improper fluids canaffect the vehicle’s stopping ability. affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. CAUTION CAUTIONDo not spill the fluid on painted sur- SDI0844 Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, wash the surface with water. CLUTCH FLUID is spilled, wash the surface with water. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN. line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX. line. If fluid is added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WINDOW WASHER FLUID This may result in damage to the paint. WARNING Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully marked containers out of the reach of children. SDI0423A SDI0389WINDOW WASHER FLUID For CANADARESERVOIR Add fluid when the low washer fluid warningFor US light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season,To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug add a windshield washer anti-freeze. Followthe center hole of the cap/tube assembly (as the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixtureshown above), then remove it from the tank. If ratio.there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid. Add awasher solvent to the water for better cleaning.In the winter season, add a windshield washer CAUTIONanti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for the mixture ratio. Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution.8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • BATTERY¼ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a ¼ Battery posts, terminals and related solution of baking soda and water. accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after han-¼ Make certain the terminal connections are dling. clean and securely tightened. ¼ Keep the battery out of the reach of¼ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the (—) negative battery children. terminal cable to prevent discharge. ¼ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid WARNING can cause a higher load on the bat- tery which can generate heat, reduce ¼ Do not expose the battery to flames battery life, and in some cases lead to or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas an explosion. DI0137M generated by battery action is explo- Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be sive. Do not allow battery fluid to JUMP STARTING between the MAX. and MIN. lines. contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump start- If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled battery or battery cap, do not touch or ing” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If water to bring the level to the indicator in each the engine does not start by jump starting, the filler opening. Do not overfill. rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your battery may have to be replaced. Contact your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, NISSAN dealer. 1. Remove the cell plugs using a suitable tool. skin or clothing, immediately flush 2. Add distilled water up to the MAX. level. with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. If the side of the battery is not visible, the electrolyte level can be checked through ¼ When working on or near a battery, each filler opening as illustrated. always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. 3. Tighten cell plugs. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • DRIVE BELTS SDI0457 SDI1119 SDI0424under severe conditions require frequent tion and tension.checks of the battery fluid level. WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. 1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un- usual wear, cuts, fraying oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER SDI0145A SDI1022A SDI1115BREPLACING SPARK PLUGS The filter element should not be cleaned and remove the spark plugs. An incorrect reused as it is given a special treatment. We socket can cause damage the spark recommended it be replaced according to the WARNING plugs. maintenance intervals. See “Periodic mainte- Platinum-tipped spark plugs nance” shown in a separate maintenanceBe sure the engine and ignition switch booklet for maintenance intervals. When re- It is not necessary to replace the platinum-are off and that the parking brake is placing the filter, wipe the inside of the air tipped spark plugs as frequently as the con-engaged securely. ventional type spark plugs since they will last cleaner housing and the cover with a damp much longer. Follow the maintenance sched- cloth. ule, but do not reuse them by cleaning or CAUTION regapping. WARNING If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for servicing.Be sure to use the correct socket to Always replace with recommended ¼ Operating the engine with the air platinum-tipped spark plugs. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES SDI0393B DI0155MA CLEANING the blades and using the wiper, replace the cleaner removed can cause you or blades. others to be burned. The air cleaner If your windshield is not clear after using the not only cleans the air, it stops flame windshield washer of if a wiper blade chatters REPLACING if the engine backfires. If it is not when running, wax or other material may be on Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. there, and the engine backfires, you the blade or windshield. could be burned. Do not drive with 1. Pull the wiper arm. Clean the outside of the windshield with a the air cleaner removed and be care- washer solution or a mild detergent. Your 2. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper ful working on the engine with the air windshield is clean if beads do not form when blade. cleaner removed. rinsing with clear water. 3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm ¼ Never pour fuel into the throttle body Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth until a click sounds. or attempt to start the engine with the soaked in a washer solution or a mild deter- air cleaner removed. Doing so could gent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If result in serious injury. your windshield is still not clear after cleaning8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL CAUTIONAfter wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.Make sure the wiper blade contacts theglass, otherwise the arm may be dam-aged from wind pressure.Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision. DI1010-C CHECKING PARKING BRAKE Pull the parking brake lever up. If the number of clicks is out of the range as listed above, see your NISSAN dealer. SDI1136 If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or im- proper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Self-adjusting brakes The rear drum brakes (if so equipped) do not have audible wear indicators. Should you ever Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting hear an unusually loud noise from the rear brakes. drum brakes, have them inspected as soon as The front and rear brakes self-adjust every possible by your NISSAN dealer. time the brake pedal is applied. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see WARNING “Periodic maintenance” shown in a separate maintenance booklet for maintenance inter- See your NISSAN dealer and have it vals. checked if the brake pedal height does BRAKE BOOSTER not return to normal. Check the brake booster function with the DI0453 following steps: Brake pad wear indicatorsCHECKING BRAKE PEDAL 1. With the engine off, press and release the The disc brake pads on your vehicle have brake pedal several times. When brakeWith the engine running, check distance A audible wear indicators. When a brake pad pedal movement (distance of travel) re-between the upper surface of the pedal and requires replacement, it will make a high mains the same from one pedal applicationthe dash lower panel. pitched scraping or screeching sound when to the next, continue on to the next step.Distance A the vehicle is in motion whether or not the 2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes M/T models engine. The pedal height should drop a checked as soon as possible if the wear indi- little. 2-1/2 in (65 mm) or more cator sound is heard. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the A/T models Under some driving or climate conditions, oc- engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for casional brake squeak, squeal or other noise 2-3/4 in (70 mm) or more about 30 seconds, the pedal height should may be heard. Occasional brake noise during not change.If it is out of the range shown above, see your light to moderate stops is normal and does notNISSAN dealer. affect the function or performance of the brake 4. Run the engine for one minute without system. depressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CLUTCH PEDAL FUSES Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradu- ally with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster.If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrake checked by your NISSAN dealer. DI0070-B SDI0395 CHECKING CLUTCH PEDAL ENGINE COMPARTMENT Press the pedal by hand and be sure the free travel is within the above limit. If free travel is CAUTION out of the range shown above, see your NISSAN dealer. Never use a fuse of higher amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the elec- trical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 2. Open the engine hood.3. Remove the fuse box cover.4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.6. If a new fuse opens again, have the elec- trical system checked and repaired by your NISSAN dealer.Fusible linksIf any electrical equipment does not operateand fuses are in good condition, check thefusible links. If any of these fusible links are SDI1169melted, replace only with genuine NISSANparts. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 6. If a new fuse opens again, have the elec- trical system checked and repaired by your If any electrical equipment does not operate, NISSAN dealer. check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull to open the fuse box cover/coin tray. 3. Pull down the fuse box cover/coin tray to remove it. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. 5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 2. Replace the battery with a new one. approved by the manufacturer compliance Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or could void the user’s authority to operate equivalent the equipment. Make sure that the ⊕ side faces the This device complies with Part 15 of the bottom case. FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. 3. Close the lid securely. Operation is subject to the following two 4. Push the keyfob button two or three times conditions: (1) This device may not cause to check its operation. harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- See your NISSAN dealer if you need any cluding interference that may cause undes- assistance for replacement. ired operation of the device. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 4 above. ¼ Be careful not to touch a circuit board and a battery terminal. ¼ An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. SPA1374 ¼ The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe com-KEYFOB BATTERY pletely dry.REPLACEMENT ¼ When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the controller.Replace the battery as follows: FCC Notice:1. Open the lid using a suitable tool. Changes or modifications not expressly Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • LIGHTS SDI11168-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • HEADLIGHTS 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. A bulb can be replaced inside the engine bulb. When aiming adjustment is neces- compartment without removing the headlight sary, contact your NISSAN dealer. assembly. CAUTION CAUTION ¼ Do not touch the bulb. ¼ High pressure halogen gas is sealed ¼ Use the same number and wattage as inside the halogen bulb. The bulb originally installed: may break if the glass envelope is Wattage 60/55 scratched or the bulb is dropped. Bulb No. HB2 ¼ When handling the bulb, do not touch ¼ Do not leave the bulb out of the head- the glass envelope. light reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture, and smoke may Removing the headlight bulb enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Pull off the rubber cap. 4. Push and turn the retaining pin to loosen it. 5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shakeSDI1126 or rotate the bulb when removing it. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. Front combination light 21/5 7443 Front fog light (H3 type) 55 Rear combination light Turn signal 27 1156NA Stop/Tail 21/5 7443 Back-up 18 921 High mounted stop light 5 168 License plate light 5 168 Interior light 10 — Vanity mirror light 1.4 — Personal light 8 — Bulb identification MDI0006Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D.When replacing a bulb, first remove the lensand/or cover.8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SDI1137 SDI0911 SDI1117 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WHEELS AND TIRES SDI0333B DI0047 If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section. TIRE PRESSURE Maximum inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum inflation pres- sures shown on the side wall of the tire. Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressure (including spare) at least once a month and always prior to long distance trip. Incorrect tire pressure may ad- versely affect tire life and vehicle handling. Tire SDI0980A pressure should be checked when tires are8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • COLD. Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for three or more ¼ Do not drive your vehicle over 85 the factory equipped tires, and mayhours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at MPH (140 km/h) unless it is equipped not match the potential maximum ve-moderate speeds. COLD tire pressures are with high speed capability tires. Driv- hicle speed. Never exceed the maxi-shown on the tire placard affixed to the inside ing faster than 85 MPH (140 km/h) mum speed rating of the tire.of the glove box lid. may result in tire failure, loss of con- ¼ For additional information regarding trol and possible injury. tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety WARNING ¼ For additional information regarding Information” in the Warranty Informa- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety tion Booklet (US) or “Tire Safety In- ¼ Improperly inflated tires can fail sud- Information” in the Warranty Informa- formation” in the Warranty Informa- denly and cause an accident. tion Booklet (US) or “Tire Safety In- tion booklet (Canada). ¼ The vehicle capacity weight is indi- formation” in the Warranty Informa- cated on the tire placard. Do not load tion booklet (Canada). your vehicle beyond this capacity. All season tires Overloading your vehicle may result NISSAN specifies all season tires on some in reduced tire life, unsafe operating TYPES OF TIRES models to provide good performance for use conditions due to premature tire fail- all year around, including snowy and icy road ure, or unfavorable handling charac- CAUTION conditions. All season tires are identified by teristics and could also lead to a ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. serious accident. Loading beyond the ¼ When changing or replacing tires, be Snow tires have better snow traction than all specified capacity may also result in sure all four tires are of the same type season tires and may be more appropriate in failure of other vehicle components. (i.e., summer, all season or snow) and some areas. ¼ Before taking a long trip, or whenever construction. Your NISSAN dealer Summer tires you have loaded your vehicle heavily, may be able to help you with informa- use a tire pressure gauge to ensure tion about tire type, size, speed rating NISSAN specifies summer tires on some mod- and availability. Replacement tires els to provide superior performance on dry that the tire pressure is at the speci- may have a lower speed rating than roads. Summer tire performance in snow and fied level. ice will be substantially reduced. Summer tires Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the and provincial laws before installing studded Do not drive with tire chains on paved roadstire sidewall. tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be such conditions can cause damage to theIf you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy various mechanisms of the vehicle due to poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of some overstress. When driving on clear pavedSNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four TIRE CHAINS roads, be sure to change to 2WD.wheels. Use of tire chains is prohibited according toSnow tires location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, makeIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to sure they are of proper size for the tires onselect tires equivalent in size and load rating to your vehicle and are installed according to thethe original equipment tires. If you do not, it chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use onlycan adversely affect the safety and handling of SAE class S chains. Other types may dam-your vehicle. age your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenGenerally, snow tires will have lower speed recommended by the tire chain manufacturerratings than factory equipped tires and may to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tirenot match the potential maximum vehicle chain must be secured or removed to preventspeed. Never exceed the maximum speed the possibility of whipping action damage torating of the tire. the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tireIf you install snow tires on four wheel drive chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.models, they must also be the same size, Otherwise, your vehicle may be damagedbrand, construction and tread pattern on all and/or vehicle handling and performance mayfour wheels. be adversely affected.If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy Never install tire chains on TEMPORARY USEconditions, NISSAN recommends the use of ONLY spare tires.SNOW or ALL SEASON tire on all four wheels. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some provinces Tire chains must be installed only on theand states prohibit their use. Check local, state rear wheels and not on the front wheels.8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WARNING ¼ After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure. ¼ Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). ¼ Do not include small size spare tire in the tire rotation. SDI0724 ¼ For additional information regarding MDI0004 tires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyCHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Information” in the Warranty Informa- Tire wear and damage tion Booklet (US) or “Tire Safety In-Tire rotation formation” in the Warranty Informa- WARNINGNISSAN recommends that tires be rotated tion booklet (Canada).every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). However, thetiming for tire rotation may vary according to ¼ Tires should be periodically in-your driving habits and road surface condi- spected for wear, cracking, bulging ortions. objects caught in the tread. If exces- sive wear, cracks, bulging or deepSee “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” cuts are found, the tire should besection for tire replacing procedures. replaced. Wheel nut tightening torque: 98 ft-lb (133 N⋅m) ¼ The original tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indica- Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • tor is visible, the tire should be re- WARNING tire even if it has been repaired. Such placed. wheels or tires could have structural ¼ The use of tires other than those damage and could fail without warn- ¼ Improper service for a TEMPORARY recommended or the mixed use of ing. USE ONLY spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is neces- tires of different brands, construction ¼ The use of retread tire is not rec- sary to repair the TEMPORARY USE (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread ommended. ONLY spare tire, contact your patterns can adversely affect the ride, ¼ For additional information regarding NISSAN dealer. braking, handling, ground clearance, tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety body-to-tire clearance, tire chain ¼ For additional information regarding Information” in the Warranty Informa- clearance, speedometer calibration, tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety tion Booklet (US) or “Tire Safety In- headlight aim and bumper height. Information” in the Warranty Informa- formation” in the Warranty Informa- Some of these effects may lead to tion Booklet (US) or “Tire Safety In- tion booklet (Canada). accidents and could result in serious formation” in the Warranty Informa- personal injury. tion booklet (Canada). ¼ If the wheels are changed for any Four wheel drive models reason, always replace with wheelsReplacing wheels and tires which have the same offset dimen- CAUTIONWhen replacing a tire, use the same size, sion. Wheels of a different offsetspeed rating and load carrying capacity as could cause early tire wear, possibly Always use tires of the same size, brand,originally equipped. See “Specifications” in the degraded vehicle handling character- construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-“9. Technical and consumer information” sec- istics and/or interference with the dial), and tread pattern on all fourtion for tires and wheels. brake discs. Such interference can wheels. Failure to do so may result in a lead to decreased braking efficiency circumference difference between tires and/or early brake pad wear. on the front and rear axles which will ¼ Do not install a deformed wheel or cause excessive tire wear and may dam-8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • to maintain their appearance. age the transmission, transfer case and gency. It should be replaced by the differential gears. ¼ Clean the inner side of the wheels when the standard tire at the first opportunity. wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. ¼ Drive carefully while the TEMPO-If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is in- ¼ Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-mended that all four tires be replaced with tires stalled. ing the wheels.of the same size, brand, construction andtread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel ¼ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or Avoid sharp turns and abrupt brakingalignment should also be checked and cor- corrosion. This may cause loss of pressure while driving.rected as necessary. Contact your NISSAN or damage the tire bead. ¼ Periodically check the TEMPORARYdealer. ¼ NISSAN recommends that the road wheels USE ONLY spare tire inflation pres-Wheel balance be waxed to protect against road salt in sure, and always keep it at 28 psi (190 areas where it is used during winter. kPa, 1.9 bar).Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle han-dling and tire life. Even with regular use, TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire ¼ Always keep the pressure of the fullwheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they (if so equipped) size spare tire (if so equipped) at theshould be balanced as required. recommended pressure for standard U.S. only. Canadian vehicles are equippedWheel balance service should be performed tires, as indicated on the tire placard. with a full size spare tire.with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing For tire placard location, see “Tirethe rear wheels on the vehicle could lead to Observe the following precautions if the TEM- placard” in the “9. Technical and con-transmission damage. PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used, sumer information” section. otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or¼ For additional information regarding tires, involved in an accident. ¼ Do not drive your vehicle at speeds refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). in the Warranty Information Booklet (US) or “Tire Safety Information” in the Warranty WARNING ¼ When driving on roads covered with Information booklet (Canada). snow or ice, the small size spare tire ¼ The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare should be used on the rear wheel andCare of wheels tire should be used only for emer-¼ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • the original tire used on the front TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains and may cause damage to the ve- only on the front two original tires. hicle. ¼ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ¼ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster spare tire is smaller than the original rate than the original tire. Replace the tire, ground clearance is reduced. To TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire as avoid damage to the vehicle do not soon as the tread wear indicators drive over obstacles. Also do not appear. drive the vehicle through an auto- matic car wash since it may get ¼ Do not use the TEMPORARY USE caught. ONLY spare tire on other vehicles. DI0117 ¼ Do not use more than one TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire at the CLUTCH HOUSING DRAIN same time. Whenever you drive in deep water or mud, ¼ Do not tow a trailer while the TEMPO- check water entry in the clutch housing by RARY USE ONLY spare tire is in- removing the blind plug at the bottom of the stalled. transmission case. After checking, be sure to reinstall the plug. CAUTION ¼ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly on the8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 9 Technical and consumer informationCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ........... 9-2 Air conditioner specification label....................... 9-14 Fuel recommendation........................................... 9-4 Vehicle loading information ..................................... 9-15 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.............. 9-6 Terms ................................................................. 9-15 Recommended SAE oil viscosity number ............ 9-7 Determining vehicle payload capacity................ 9-15 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant Securing the load ............................................... 9-16 recommendations ................................................. 9-8 Loading tips ........................................................ 9-16Specifications ............................................................ 9-9 Payload weight capacity..................................... 9-17 Engine .................................................................. 9-9 Measurement of weights .................................... 9-17Wheels and tires ..................................................... 9-11 Towing a trailer ....................................................... 9-17 Dimensions and weights .................................... 9-11 Maximum load limits........................................... 9-17When traveling or registering your vehicle in another Towing load/specification chart .......................... 9-19country..................................................................... 9-12 Towing safety ..................................................... 9-19Vehicle identification ............................................... 9-12 Uniform tire quality grading ................................ 9-21 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate........... 9-12 Emission control system warranty .......................... 9-22 Vehicle identification number (Chassis Reporting safety defects (US only) ......................... 9-22 number) .............................................................. 9-12 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test Engine serial number ......................................... 9-13 (US only) ................................................................. 9-23 F.M.V.S.S. certification label .............................. 9-13 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order Emission control information label ..................... 9-14 information............................................................... 9-25 Tire placard ........................................................ 9-14 In the event of a collision ................................... 9-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • CAPACITIES ANDRECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTSThe following values are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different from them. When refilling, follow theprocedure instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Capacity (Approximate) US Imp Recommended specifications Liter measure measure Unleaded gasoline with an octane ratingFuel 20-7/8 gal 17-3/8 gal 79 of at least 91 AKI (RON 96) (VQ35DE) or 87AKI (RON 91) (VG33E)*1Engine oil*4Drain and refill with oil filter ¼ API Certification Mark*2 *3 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt 5.0 ¼ API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I change & II or API grade SJ, Energy Conserv- without oil filter ing*2 *3 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8 change ¼ ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II*2 *3Cooling system Genuine Nissan Anti-Freeze Coolant or(with heater and 9-3/4 qt 8-1/8 qt 9.2 equivalentreservoir tank)*1: See later in this section for fuel recommendation.*2: See later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number.*3: See later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*4: See “Changing engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for further details.9-2 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Capacity (Approximate) US Imp Recommended specifications Liter measure measureManual transmission — — — API GL-4 Viscosity SAE 75W-85 onlyDifferential gear oil (exc. LSD) — — — API GL-5*1 Only LSD gear oil:Limited-slip differential (LSD) gear oil — — — API GL-5 and SAE 80W-90*2 approved for Nissan LSD*3 Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or CanadaAutomatic transmission fluid NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*6Power steering fluid Genuine Nissan PSF II or equivalent*7 Refill to the proper oil level according to the instruc- Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or CanadaAll-mode 4WD transfer fluid tions in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*8 tion.Transfer fluid Nissan Matic “C”*6 or API GL-4*1 Genuine Nissan Brake Fluid*4 or equivalentBrake and clutch fluid DOT 3 (U.S. F.M.V.S.S. No. 116)Propeller shaft grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Molybdenum disulphide lithium soap base)Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*5Air conditioning system lubricants — — — Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent*5*1: For further details, see recommended SAE viscosity number chart.*2: SAE 90 is acceptable in temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).*3: Contact your NISSAN dealer for a list of approved oils.*4: Available in mainland U.S. through your NISSAN dealer.*5: See “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.*6: Never mix Nissan Matic “C” and API GL-4 oil.*7: Genuine Nissan PSF, Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid, DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.*8: Outside the continental U.S. and Alaska contact an authorized NISSAN dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid. Technical and consumer information 9-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FUEL RECOMMENDATION ¼ If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a Under no circumstances should a methanol blend, is used, it should con-VG33E engine: leaded gasoline be used since this will tain no more than 10% oxygenate.Your vehicle is designed to operate on damage the three way catalyst. (MTBE may, however, be added up tounleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 15%.)at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number ¼ If a methanol blend is used, it should(Research octane number 91). Reformulated gasoline contain no more than 5% methanol (me-VQ35DE engine: Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor- thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should mulated gasolines. These gasolines are spe- also contain a suitable amount of appro-Use unleaded premium gasoline with an cially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air tors. If not properly formulated with ap-Index) number (Research octane number and suggest that you use reformulated gaso- propriate cosolvents and corrosion96). line when available. inhibitors, such methanol blends mayIf unleaded premium gasoline is not avail- cause fuel system damage and/or ve- Gasoline containing oxygenates hicle performance problems. At thisable, unleaded regular gasoline with anoctane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing time, sufficient data is not available tooctane number 91) can be used. oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and ensure that all methanol blends are suit- methanol with or without advertising their pres- able for use in Nissan vehicles.However, for maximum vehicle perfor- ence. Nissan does not recommend the use of If any undesirable driveability problems suchmance, the use of unleaded premium gaso- fuels of which the oxygenate content and the as engine stalling and hard hot starting areline is recommended. fuel compatibility for your Nissan cannot be experienced after using oxygenate-blend fu- readily determined. els, immediately change to a non-oxygenate CAUTION If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. take the following precautions as the usage of Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- Using a fuel other than that specified such fuels may cause vehicle performance eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can could adversely affect the emission con- problems and/or fuel system damage. cause paint damage. trol devices and systems, and could ¼ The fuel should be unleaded and have Aftermarket fuel additives also affect the warranty coverage. an octane rating no lower than that rec- ommended for unleaded gasoline. NISSAN does not recommend the use of any9-4 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • fuel additives (i.e.: fuel injector cleaner, octane while holding a steady speed on levelbooster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) roads, have your dealer correct the condi-which are sold commercially. Many of these tion. Failure to correct the condition isadditives intended for gum, varnish or deposit misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN isremoval may contain active solvents or similar not responsible.ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,system and engine. after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damageOctane rating tips to the engine. If any of the above symptomsIn most parts of North America, you should use are encountered, have your vehicle checked atunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at a NISSAN dealer or other competent serviceleast 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number facility.(VQ35DE engine) or 87 AKI (Anti-knock Index) However, now and then you may noticenumber (VG33E engine). However, you may light spark knock for a short time whileuse unleaded gasoline with an octane rating accelerating or driving up hills. This is noas low as 85 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number in cause for concern, because you get thethese high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 greatest fuel benefit when there is lightm)] such as: Colorado, Montana, New Mexico, spark knock for a short time.Utah, Wyoming, northeastern Nevada, south-ern Idaho, western South Dakota, westernNebraska, and that part of Texas which isdirectly south of New Mexico.Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than stated above can causepersistent, heavy spark knock. (Sparkknock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knock Technical and consumer information 9-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • used in your NISSAN vehicle. These oils must however, meet the API quality and SAE vis- cosity ratings specified for your vehicle. Do not mix mineral based and synthetic type oils in the engine at the same time. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. STI0293 Oil viscosityENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER MARK on the front of the container should be The engine oil viscosity or thickness changesRECOMMENDATION used. This type of oil supersedes the existing with temperature. Because of this, it is impor- API SG, SH, or SJ and Energy Conserving I & tant that the engine oil viscosity be selectedSelecting the correct oil II categories. based on the temperatures at which the ve- If you cannot find engine oil with the API hicle will be operated before the next oilIt is essential to choose the correct quality, and CERTIFICATION MARK, use an API grade change. The chart recommended SAE viscos-viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life ity number shows the recommended oil vis-and performance. Nissan recommends the SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade cosities for the expected ambient tempera-use of a low friction oil (energy conserving oil) SJ, Energy Conserving oil. An oil with a single tures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than thatin order to improve fuel economy and con- designation SG or SH, or in combination with recommended could cause serious engineserve energy. Oils which do not have the other categories (for example, SG/CC or damage.specified quality label should not be used as SG/CD) may also be used if one with the APIthey could cause engine damage. CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. An Selecting the correct oil filter ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II oil can also be used.Only those engine oils with the American Pe- Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-troleum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION Mineral based or synthetic type oils may be quality genuine Nissan oil filter. When replac-9-6 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • ing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent RECOMMENDED SAE OIL SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for allfor the reason described in change intervals. VISCOSITY NUMBER ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if theChange intervals ambient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).The oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Oil and filter other thanthe specified quality, or oil and filter changeintervals longer than recommended could re-duce engine life. Damage to engines causedby improper maintenance or use of incorrectoil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the new Nissan vehicle warranties.Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not have tochange the oil before the first recommendedchange interval. Oil and filter change intervalsdepend upon how you use your vehicle. Op-eration under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes.— repeated short distance driving at cold out- side temperatures,— driving in dusty conditions,— extensive idling, TI1028-C— towing a trailer. Technical and consumer information 9-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT your air conditioning system. RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioning system in this NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger- ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact equivalents. CAUTION The use of any other refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will re- quire the replacement of all air condi- tioning system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s TI0003B ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain govern-¼ All-mode 4WD model: mental regulations require the recovery and 80W-90 for differential is preferable. recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. Your NISSAN¼ Except all-mode 4WD model: dealer has the trained technicians and equip- 75W-90 for transfer, and 80W-90 for dif- ment needed to recover and recycle your air ferential are preferable. conditioning system refrigerant.9-8 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • SPECIFICATIONSENGINE Model VQ35DE VG33EType Gasoline, 4-cycle Gasoline, 4-cycleCylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60° 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°Bore × Stroke in (mm) 3.760 × 3.205 (95.5 × 81.4) 3.602 × 3.268 (91.5 × 83.0)Displacement 213.45 (3,498) 199.84 (3,275) cu in (cm3)Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6Idle speed rpmIgnition timing (BTDC) See the “Emission control See the “Emission control degree/rpm label” on the underside of the hood. label” on the underside of the hood.CO percentage at idle speed [No air] %Spark plug PL FR5A-11 (Standard) FR4AP-10 (Hot) PL FR4A-11 (Service option) FR5AP-10 (Standard) PL FR6A-11 (Service option) FR6AP-10 (Cold)Spark plug gap in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.039 (1.0)Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing belt*1Alternator belt size Width × Length 0.8409 × 46.26 (21.36 × 1,175) 0.8409 × 41.93 (21.36 × 1,065) in (mm)*1: Periodic maintenance is necessary. See “Periodic maintenance” in the “Service and Maintenance Guide” for maintenance intervals. Technical and consumer information 9-9 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TI0001-AThe spark ignition system of this vehiclemeets all requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regula-tions.9-10 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WHEELS AND TIRES Grade Road wheel/ Tire Spare tire size DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS offset in (mm) PATHFINDER4x2 PATH- XE 16x7JJ Aluminum/ P245/70R16 P245/70R16 106S Overall length*1 in (mm) 182.7 (4,640) FINDER 1.97 (50)*1 106S 215/80R16 103M*2 Overall width in (mm) 69.7 (1,770) SE 16x7JJ Aluminum/ P255/65R16 P255/65R16 106S 71.7 (1,820)*2 WIDE 0.79 (20) 106S 215/80R16 103M*2 Overall height in (mm) 68.1 (1,730) 67.9 (1,725)*2 LE 17x8JJ Aluminum/ P245/65R17 P245/65R17 105S WIDE 0.79 (20) 105S 215/80R16 103M*2 Front tread in (mm) 58.3 (1,480) 60.6 (1,540)*24x4 PATH- XE 16x7JJ Aluminum/ P245/70R16 P245/70R16 106S FINDER 1.97 (50)*1 106S Rear tread in (mm) 58.5 (1,485) 60.8 (1,545)*2 SE 16x7JJ Aluminum/ P255/65R16 P255/65R16 106S Wheelbase in (mm) 106.3 (2,700) WIDE 0.79 (20) 106S Gross vehicle weight rating See the “F.M.V.S.S. certification LE 17x8JJ Aluminum/ P245/65R17 P245/65R17 105S lb (kg) label” on the driver’s side lock WIDE 0.79 (20) 105S pillar. Gross axle weight rating*1: Option Front lb (kg)*2: If so equipped (for US) Rear lb (kg) *1: On spare tire carrier equipped models, the spare tire carrier adds 9.45 in (240 mm) to the overall length. *2: SE and LE wide models Technical and consumer information 9-11 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • WHEN TRAVELING ORREGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONANOTHER COUNTRYWhen planning to travel in another country,you should first find out if the fuel available issuitable for your vehicle’s engine.Using fuel with too low an octane ratingmay cause engine damage. All gasolinevehicles can be operated with unleadedgasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your ve-hicle to areas where appropriate fuel is notavailable.When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations. STI0095 STI0227The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standards vary VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONaccording to the country, state, province ordistrict; therefore, vehicle specifications may NUMBER (VIN) PLATE NUMBER (Chassis number)differ. The vehicle identification number plate is at-When any vehicle is to be taken into an- tached as shown. This number is the identifi-other country, state, province or district cation for your vehicle and is used in theand registered, its modifications, transpor- vehicle registration.tation and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.9-12 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • STI0230 STI0094A STI0096ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABELThe number is stamped on the engine as The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standardshown. (F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Re- view it carefully. Technical and consumer information 9-13 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • STI0228 STI0225 STI0229EMISSION CONTROL TIRE PLACARD AIR CONDITIONERINFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire SPECIFICATION LABELThe emission control information label is at- placard. The air conditioner specification label is at-tached as shown. tached as shown.9-14 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • VEHICLE LOADINGINFORMATION ¼ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex- WARNING maximum total weight (load) limit specified ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove for the vehicle. cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or ¼ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a ¼ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi- remove cargo as necessary. cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a mum weight (load) limit specified for the collision, people riding in these areas front or rear axle. are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. DETERMINING VEHICLE PAYLOAD CAPACITY ¼ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not The payload capacity of this vehicle is deter- equipped with seats and seat belts. mined by weight, not by available cargo space. For example, a luggage rack, bike carrier, ¼ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in cartop carrier or similar equipment does not a seat and using a seat belt properly. increase payload carrying capacity of your vehicle.TERMS To determine vehicle payload capacity:It is important to familiarize yourself with the Vehicle weight can be determined by using afollowing terms before loading your vehicle: commercial-grade scale, found at places such as a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator,¼ Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) or a scrap metal recycling facility. - vehicle weight including: standard and 1) Determine the curb weight of your vehicle. optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight 2) Compare the curb weight amount to the does not include passengers and cargo. GVWR specified for your vehicle to deter- mine how much more weight your vehicle¼ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight can carry. plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. 3) After loading (cargo and passengers), re- weigh your vehicle to determine if either Technical and consumer information 9-15 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • LOADING TIPS ¼ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the FMVSS Certifi- cation Label located on the driver’s door center pillar. ¼ Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. ¼ Loads should be spread out, and cargo should be properly secured. Large or heavy objects should be placed toward the front of the cargo area to help prevent sliding or shifting. SPA0408A SPA0365SECURING THE LOAD WARNINGThere are tie down hooks located in the cargo ¼ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-area. The tie down hooks can be used to vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notsecure cargo with ropes or other types of place cargo higher than the seat-straps. backs. In a sudden stop or collision,Do not apply a total load of more than 22 unsecured cargo could cause per-lbs. (10 kg) to a single hook when securing sonal injury.cargo. ¼ Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles.9-16 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TOWING A TRAILER MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scalePAYLOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY and weight the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. IndividualThe payload weight capacity is the maximum axle loads should not exceed either of thetotal weight of passengers, optional equipment gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of(air conditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargo the axle loads should not exceed the grossthat your vehicle is designed to carry. vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratingsBefore driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that are given on the vehicle certification label thatyou do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight is located on the driver’s door lock pillar. IfRating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight weight ratings are exceeded, move or removeRating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Vehicle items to bring all weights below the ratings. CA0009loading information” earlier in this section fordetails. CAUTION Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. member that towing a trailer will place addi-See the tire placard affixed to the glove box lid. Overloading can shorten the life of your tional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive vehicle. Failures caused by overloading train, steering, braking and other systems. Payload Weight Capacity Unit: lb (kg) are not covered by your warranty. VQ35DE A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (US only) is 2WD 4WD available from an authorized NISSAN dealer. This guide includes information on trailer tow- Automatic and Automatic and ing ability and the special equipment required Manual Trans- Manual Trans- for proper towing. mission mission XE, SE, LE MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS US 980 (445) 970 (440) Maximum trailer loads Canada — 945 (430) Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the Technical and consumer information 9-17 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • value specified in the following TowingLoad/Specification Chart. The total trailer load WARNINGequals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.¼ When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs. Vehicle damage and/or personal injury (454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake resulting from improper towing proce- system MUST be used. dures is not covered by NISSAN warran-The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined ties. A NISSAN Trailer Towing GuideWeight Rating) should not exceed the value (U.S. only) containing information onspecified in the following Towing Load/ trailer towing ability and the specialSpecification Chart. equipment required may be obtainedThe GCWR equals the combined weight of the from an authorized NISSAN dealer.towing vehicle (including passengers andcargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loadsgreater than these or using improper towing Tongue load CA0036equipment could adversely affect vehicle han- Keep the tongue load between 9 to 11% of the Maximum gross vehicle weight/dling, braking and performance. total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing maximum gross axle weightThe ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but Load/Specifications Chart. If the tongue load The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclealso the places you plan to tow. Tow weights becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow must not exceed the gross vehicle weightappropriate for level highway driving may have for proper tongue load. rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S. cer-to be reduced on very steep grades or in low tification label. The gross vehicle weighttraction situations (for example, on slippery equals the combined weight of the unloadedboat ramps). vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.9-18 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART TOWING SAFETY TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Trailer hitch Unit: lb (kg) Check the towing capacity of your receiver MODEL PATHFINDER VQ35DE/VG33E (6-Cyl.) type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper WEIGHT M/T A/T hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT*1 3,500 (1,588) 5,000 (2,268) NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (US only). Make sure the MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 350 (159) 500 (227) trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT to help avoid personal injury or property dam- 8,000 (3,628) 9,500 (4,308) RATING age due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough RECOMMENDED EQUIP- road surfaces or passing trucks. Sway Control Device (SCD) MENT*2*1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use CAUTION of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg). ¼ Special hitches which include frame*2: A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway control devices are not offered by NISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly designed sway reinforcements are required for tow- control device for your trailer. ing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable Genuine NISSAN hitches for pickup truck and sport utility vehicles are available at an authorized NISSAN dealer. ¼ Do not use axle-mounted hitches. ¼ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. Technical and consumer information 9-19 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • vehicle and the trailer. The chain should be the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice ¼ After the hitch is removed, seal the crossed and should be attached to the hitch, turning, stopping and backing up in an area bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to which is free from traffic. Steering stability and water or dust from entering the pas- leave enough slack in the chain to permit braking performance will be somewhat differ- senger compartment. turning corners. ent than under normal driving conditions. ¼ Regularly check all hitch mounting Trailer lights ¼ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent bolts are securely mounted. load shift while driving. Trailer lights should comply with Federal ¼ To reduce the possibility of additional and/or local regulations. ¼ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. damage if your vehicle is struck from When wiring vehicle for towing connection, ¼ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. the rear, where practical, remove the connect stop and tail light pickup into the vehicle electrical circuit at point between ¼ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate hitch and/or receiver when not in use. the sensor and stop light switch or light speed. ¼ Never connect a trailer brake system switch. ¼ Always block the wheels on both vehicle directly to the vehicle brake system. and trailer when parking. Parking on a Trailer brakes slope is not recommended; however, if you If your trailer is equipped with a braking sys- must do so, and if your vehicle is equippedTire pressures tem, make sure it conforms to Federal and/or with automatic transmission, first block the¼ When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle local regulations and that it is properly in- wheels and apply the parking brake, and tires to the recommended cold tire pressure stalled. then move the transmission selector lever indicated on the tire placard (affixed to the into the P position. If you move the selector lever to the P position before blocking the glove box lid). WARNING wheels and applying the parking brake,¼ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and transmission damage could occur. proper inflation pressure should be in ac- Never connect a trailer brake system ¼ When going down a hill, shift into a lower cordance with the trailer and tire manufac- directly to the vehicle brake system. gear and use the engine braking effect. turers’ specifications. When ascending a long grade, downshiftSafety chains Trailer towing tips the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over-Always use a suitable chain between your In order to gain skill and an understanding of loading and/or overheating.9-20 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • However, for long steep grades, do not stay in Quality grades can be found where applicable1st or 2nd gear when driving above 35 MPH on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder WARNING(56 km/h). and maximum section width. For example:¼ If the engine coolant rises to an extremely Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The traction grade assigned to your ve- high temperature when the air conditioning hicle tires is based on straight-ahead Treadwear braking traction tests, and does not in- system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by Treadwear grade is a comparative rating clude acceleration, cornering, hydro- opening the windows, switching the fan based on tire wear rate when tested under planing, or peak traction characteristics. control to high and setting the temperature controlled conditions on specified government control to the HOT position. test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well Temperature A, B and C¼ Trailer towing requires more fuel than nor- on the government course as a tire graded mal circumstances. 100. However, relative tire performance de- Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, pends on actual driving conditions, and may and C. They represent a tire’s resistance to¼ Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat vary significantly due to variations in driving (800 km). when tested under controlled conditions on a habits, service practices and differences in specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-¼ Have your vehicle serviced more often than road characteristics and climate. tained high temperature can cause tire mate- at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule. Traction AA, A, B and C rial to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive The traction grades from highest to lowest are temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.When towing a trailer, change oil in the AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the Grade C corresponds to a performance leveltransmission more frequently. See the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- which all passenger car tires must meet underMaintenance Schedule. sured under controlled conditions on specified the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. government test surfaces of asphalt and con- 109. Grades A and B represent higher levels ofUNIFORM TIRE QUALITY crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance on laboratory test wheels thanGRADING performance. the minimum required by law.DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tire must conform toFederal Safety Requirements in addition tothese grades. Technical and consumer information 9-21 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS WARRANTY (US only) Your NISSAN is covered by the following If you believe that your vehicle has WARNING emission warranties. a defect which could cause a crash For US: or could cause injury or death, you The temperature grade for this tire is should immediately inform the Na- ¼ Emission Defects Warranty established for a tire that is properly tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad- inflated and not overloaded. Excessive ¼ Emissions Performance Warranty ministration (NHTSA) in addition to speed, under inflation, or excessive For CANADA: loading, either separately or in combina- notifying NISSAN. Emission Control System Warranty tion, can cause heat build-up and pos- If NHTSA receives similar com- sible tire failure. Details of these warranties may be found with plaints, it may open an investiga- other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- tion, and if it finds that a safety formation Booklet which comes with your defect exists in a group of vehicles, NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it becomes lost, you it may order a recall and remedy may obtain a replacement by writing to: campaign. However, NHTSA can- not become involved in individual ¼ Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Af- fairs Department P.O. Box 191 Gardena. problems between you, your dealer, CA 90248-0191 or NISSAN. ¼ Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive To contact NHTSA, you may either Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. If you reside in Hawaii, please call 808-836-0888. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hot- line.9-22 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)You may notify NISSAN by contact- Due to legal requirements in some states/ points between the C and H (normal oper-ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- areas, your vehicle may be required to be in ating temperature).ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. what is called the ready condition for an 2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-In Hawaii call (808) 836-0888. sion control system. km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at The vehicle is set to the ready condition when least 6 seconds. it is driven through certain driving patterns. 3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a Usually, the ready condition can be obtained moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed by ordinary usage of the vehicle. of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least If a powertrain system component is repaired 5 minutes. or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may 4. Stop the vehicle. be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the 5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready and maintain the speed for 20 seconds. condition. If you cannot or do not want to 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times. perform the driving pattern, an NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. 7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 min- utes. WARNING 8. Stop the vehicle (shift lever in the “P” or “N” Always drive the vehicle in a safe and position). prudent manner according to traffic con- 9. Rev the engine up between 2,500 and ditions, and obey all traffic laws. 3,500 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes, then release the accelerator pedal 1. Start the engine when the engine coolant completely. temperature gauge needle points to C. Al- 10.Wait 5 second at idle. low the engine to idle until the gauge needle 11.Rev the engine up between 2,000 and Technical and consumer information 9-23 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 3,000 rpm and maintain it for 5 consecutive minutes. ¼ Serious damage will occur to the 4WD system if the transfer control12.Turn the engine off. lever is not in the 2H position.13.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more time.If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac-ceptable between steps. Do not stop the en-gine until step 7 is completed.Dynamometer testing for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test (US only)Due to legal requirements in somestates/areas, your vehicle may be tested foremissions on a dynamometer. The transfercontrol lever (if so equipped) MUST be in the2H position for I/M testing on a two wheeldynamometer. WARNING ¼ If the transfer control lever is not in the 2H position during the dynamom- eter I/M testing, the vehicle could come off the dynamometer and cause serious personal injury and/or body damage to the vehicle.9-24 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for the 2002 model year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN dealer, or contact: DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. 20770 Westwood Dr. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 In Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For theA genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best In the USA: phone number and location of a NISSANsource of service and repair information for Dealer in your area call the NISSAN Satisfac- For current pricing and availability of genuine tion Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingualyour vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illus- NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model NISSAN representative will assist you.trations and step-by-step diagnostic and ad- year and later, contact:justment procedures, this manual is the same Also available are Genuine NISSAN Serviceone used by the factory trained technicians Tweddle Litho Company and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN mod-working at authorized NISSAN dealerships. 1-800-639-8841 els.Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner’s www.nissan-techinfo.comManuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models. For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this un- year and prior, see an authorized NISSAN likely event, there is some important informa- dealer, or contact: tion you should know. Many insurance compa- nies routinely authorize the use of non- DDS Distribution Services, Ltd. genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, 20770 Westwood Dr. among other reasons. Strongsville OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 Technical and consumer information 9-25 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Insist on the use of Genuine Nissan Why should you take a chance?Collision Parts! In over 40 states, the law says you must beIf you want your vehicle to be restored using advised if non-genuine parts are used to repairparts made to NISSAN’s original exacting your vehicle. And some states have enactedspecifications — if you want to help it to last laws that restrict insurance companies fromand hold its resale value, the solution is authorizing the use of non-genuine collisionsimple. Tell your insurance agent and your parts during the new vehicle warranty. Theserepair shop to only use Genuine Nissan laws help protect you, so you can take actionCollision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant to protect yourself.non-Nissan parts, nor does NISSAN’s war-ranty apply to damage caused by a non- It’s your right!genuine part. If you should need further information visit us at: www.nissandriven.com.Using Genuine Nissan Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warrantyprotection and maintain the resale value ofyour vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased,using Genuine Nissan Parts may prevent orlimit unnecessary excess wear and tear ex-penses at the end of your lease.NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zonesto minimize the risk that the hood will penetratethe windshield of your vehicle in an accident.Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not providesuch built in safeguards. Also, non-genuineparts often show premature wear, rust andcorrosion.9-26 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO Technical and consumer information 9-27 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO9-28 Technical and consumer information ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • 10 Index Appearance care Brake A Exterior appearance care............................ 7-2 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................... 5-32 Interior appearance care ............................. 7-3 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-18ABS (Anti-lock brake system)......................... 5-32 Armrest ............................................................. 1-9 Brake booster ............................................ 8-26Air bag system Ashtray (See cigarette lighter and ashtray).... 2-26 Brake fluid ................................................. 8-18 Front (See supplemental front airbag system) ...................................................... 1-16 ATP warning light ........................................... 2-10 Brake pedal ............................................... 8-25 Side (See supplemental side air bag Audible reminders ........................................... 2-15 Brake pedal check..................................... 8-26 system) ...................................................... 1-18 Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-12 Brake system............................................. 5-32Air bag warning labels .................................... 1-20 Audio system .................................................. 4-11 Parking brake check ........................ 5-16, 8-25Air bag warning light.............................. 1-21, 2-12 Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-30 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-16Air cleaner housing filter ................................. 8-23 Automatic Warning light ............................................. 2-10Air conditioner Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-16 Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-19 Air conditioner operation...................... 4-2, 4-8 Drive positioner ......................................... 3-16 Driving with automatic Bulb check/instrument panel ............................ 2-9 Air conditioner service ................ 4-2, 4-8, 4-10 transmission ....................................... 5-6, 5-10 Bulb replacement ............................................ 8-30 Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-14 Air conditioning system refrigerant and Seat positioner, seat ................................. 3-16 lubricant recommendations................ 4-10, 9-8 Transmission park warning light ............... 2-10 C Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ....... 4-8 Transmission selector lever lock release .. 5-13 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-2 Avoiding collision and rollover .......................... 5-4 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants... 9-2 Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-2 Car phone or CB radio ................................... 4-32Air conditioner operation, Semiautomatic......... 4-5 B Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........ 2-33Air flow charts ................................................... 4-5 Cargo net ........................................................ 2-33Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................ 5-4 Battery............................................................. 8-21 Cassette player (See audio system) .... 4-16, 4-23,Anchor point locations Battery saver system................................. 2-20 4-28 Top tether strap......................................... 1-41 Battery replacement, (See remote keyless entry Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst............ 5-3Antenna........................................................... 4-31 system) ............................................................. 3-8 CD care and cleaning ..................................... 4-26Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)........................ 5-32 Before starting the engine ................................ 5-9 Child restraints ................................................ 1-31Anti-lock brake warning light............................. 2-9 Belts (See drive belts) .................................... 8-22 Installation on front passenger seat.......... 1-42 Installation on rear seat outboard positions .................................................... 1-35 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Installation on rear seat center position .... 1-33 Cruise control.................................................. 5-17 Changing engine oil filter .......................... 8-15 Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-31 Cup holders .................................................... 2-28 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-9 Top tether strap anchor point locations .... 1-41 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-13 With top tether strap.................................. 1-40 Coolant temperature gauge ........................ 2-4 DChild safety ..................................................... 1-24 Engine compartment check locations ......... 8-7Child safety rear door lock................................ 3-4 Daytime running light system ......................... 2-21 Engine cooling system ................................ 8-9Chimes, Audible reminders............................. 2-15 Defogger switch, Glass hatch and outside mirror Engine oil................................................... 8-13Cigarette lighter and ashtray .......................... 2-26 defogger switch............................................... 2-19 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-6Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................ 8-28 Dimensions and weights................................. 9-11 Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-6Cleaning exterior and interior .................... 7-2, 7-3 Door open warning light ................................. 2-11 Engine serial number ................................ 9-13Clock ............................................................... 2-25 Drive belts ....................................................... 8-22 Engine specifications................................... 9-9Clutch Drive positioner, Automatic............................. 3-16 If your vehicle overheats ........................... 6-11 Clutch pedal .............................................. 8-27 Driving Starting the engine ...................................... 5-9 Fluid........................................................... 8-18 Cold weather driving ................................. 5-34 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ...................... 5-2Clutch housing drain (4x4 only)...................... 8-40 Driving with automatic transmission .. 5-6, 5-10Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-34 Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-7, 5-14 FCompact Disc (CD) player (See audio On-pavement and offroad driving ............... 5-3system) ........................................................... 4-17 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 F.M.V.S.S. certification label........................... 9-13Compact spare tire ......................................... 8-39 Safety precautions....................................... 5-4 Filter, Air cleaner housing filter....................... 8-23Compass display .............................................. 2-7Console box .................................................... 2-30 Flashers (See hazard warning flasherControls E switch) ............................................................. 2-23 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-2 Flat tire .............................................................. 6-2 Heater and air conditioner controls Economy, Fuel ................................................ 5-19 Floor mat cleaning ............................................ 7-4 (automatic)................................................... 4-8 Electric sunroof ............................................... 2-36 Fluid Heater and semiautomatic air conditioner .. 4-3 Emission control information label.................. 9-14 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-16 Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-30 Emission control system warranty .................. 9-22 Brake and clutch fluid................................ 8-18Coolant Engine Brake fluid ................................................. 8-18 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Before starting the engine........................... 5-9 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Block heater .............................................. 5-35 lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Changing engine coolant .......................... 8-10 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Engine coolant............................................. 8-9 Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-9 lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Engine oil................................................... 8-13Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-4 Changing engine coolant .......................... 8-10 Power steering fluid................................... 8-18Cover, Tonneau cover .................................... 2-33 Changing engine oil .................................. 8-14 Window washer fluid ................................. 8-2010-2 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • FM-AM radio with cassette player and Compact Glass hatch lock ............................................. 3-11 Indicator lights................................................. 2-13Disc (CD) player ............................................. 4-14 Glass hatch opener ........................................ 3-11 Inside mirror .................................................... 3-15Fog light switch ............................................... 2-23 Glasses case .................................................. 2-28 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test................... 9-23Four wheel drive (4WD) ........................ 5-20, 5-23 Glove box........................................................ 2-29 Instrument panel ............................................... 2-24WD shift switch operations ........................... 5-26 Glove box lock ................................................ 2-29 Interior lights ................................................... 2-38Front air bag system (See supplemental restraintsystem) ........................................................... 1-16 H JFront fog light switch ...................................... 2-23Front manual seat adjustment .......................... 1-2 Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-23 Jump starting .................................................... 6-9Front power seat adjustment ............................ 1-4Fuel Head restraints ................................................. 1-9 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Headlights K lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-31 Filler cap.................................................... 3-12 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-20 Keys .................................................................. 3-2 Filler lid ...................................................... 3-12 Heated seats................................................... 2-24 Fuel economy............................................ 5-19 Heater L Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-4 Engine coolant heater ............................... 5-35 Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-4 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ....... 4-8 Label, Air conditioner specification label ........ 9-14 Gauge.......................................................... 2-5 Heater and air conditioner controls ............. 4-2 Label, Emission control information label....... 9-14Fuses .............................................................. 8-27 Heater operation.......................................... 4-2 Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label................ 9-13Fusible links .................................................... 8-28 Heater operation, Semiautomatic air Labels conditioner ........................................................ 4-4 Air bag warning labels............................... 1-20 Hood, release ................................................... 3-9 Engine serial number ................................ 9-13 G Hook, Luggage hook ...................................... 2-32 Vehicle identification number (VIN)........... 9-12 Horn ................................................................ 2-24 LightGas cap .......................................................... 3-12 How to stop alarm, Vehicle security ............... 2-16 Air bag warning light ................................. 1-21Gauge ............................................................... 2-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge............. 2-4 Bulb replacement ...................................... 8-30 Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5 I Fog light switch ......................................... 2-23 Odometer..................................................... 2-3 Front fog light switch ................................. 2-23 Speedometer ............................................... 2-3 Ignition switch ................................................... 5-6 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-20 Tachometer ................................................. 2-4 Automatic transmission models ......... 5-6, 5-10 Headlights Bulb replacement .................... 8-31General maintenance ....................................... 8-2 Key positions ............................................... 5-8 Interior lights.............................................. 2-38Glass hatch and outside mirror defogger Manual transmission models ............. 5-7, 5-14 Personal lights........................................... 2-39switch .............................................................. 2-19 Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-17 Replacement ............................................. 8-30 10-3 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Vanity mirror light ...................................... 2-40 Personal lights ................................................ 2-39 N Warning/indicator lights and audible Phone, Car phone or CB radio....................... 4-32 reminders ........................................... 2-9, 2-13 PowerLoading information (See vehicle loading Net, Cargo net ................................................ 2-33 Front seat adjustment ................................. 1-4information) ..................................................... 9-15 New vehicle break-in ...................................... 5-19 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2Lock Nissan vehicle Immobilizer System ................ 2-15 Power outlet .............................................. 2-25 Door locks ................................................... 3-2 Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System, Engine Power steering fluid................................... 8-18 Glass hatch lock........................................ 3-11 start ................................................................... 5-8 Power steering system.............................. 5-31 Glove box lock........................................... 2-29 Power windows ......................................... 2-35 Power door lock .......................................... 3-2 O Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-19 Rear door lock........................................... 3-10 Precautions Rear door opener ...................................... 3-10 Odometer .......................................................... 2-3 Audio operation precautions ..................... 4-12Low fuel warning light ..................................... 2-12 Oil Braking precautions................................... 5-32Luggage hooks ............................................... 2-32 Capacities and recommended fuel/ Cruise control operations .......................... 5-18Luggage rack .................................................. 2-34 lubricants ..................................................... 9-2 Cruise control precautions ........................ 5-17 Changing engine oil .................................. 8-14 Driving safety............................................... 5-4 M Changing engine oil filter .......................... 8-15 Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-13 On child restraints ..................................... 1-31Maintenance Engine oil................................................... 8-13 On seat belt usage.................................... 1-23 Battery ....................................................... 8-21 Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-6 On-pavement and offroad driving General maintenance .................................. 8-2 Outside mirror control ..................................... 3-15 precautions .................................................. 5-3 Inside the vehicle ........................................ 8-3 Outside mirrors ............................................... 3-15 Precautions on supplemental restraint Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5 Outside temperature display............................. 2-6 system ....................................................... 1-10 Outside the vehicle...................................... 8-2 Overdrive switch ............................................. 5-13 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-31 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................ 6-11 Push starting ................................................... 6-10 Under the hood and vehicle........................ 8-4Manual front seat adjustment ........................... 1-2 P RMeters and gauges ........................................... 2-3Mirror Parking Rack, Luggage rack........................................ 2-34 Inside mirror .............................................. 3-15 Brake check............................................... 8-25 Radio Outside mirror control................................ 3-15 Parking brake check.................................. 5-16 Car phone or CB radio.............................. 4-32 Outside mirrors.......................................... 3-15 Parking brake operation ............................ 5-16 Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-30 Parking on hills.......................................... 5-16 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test Parking/parking on hills .................................. 5-30 (US only) ......................................................... 9-2310-4 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Rear door ........................................................ 3-10 Seat belt hook ........................................... 1-28 Power steering system.............................. 5-31Rear door lock ................................................ 3-10 Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-31 Steering wheel switch for audio controls .. 4-30 Child safety rear door lock .......................... 3-4 Seat belts .................................................. 1-22 Tilting steering wheel ................................ 3-14Rear door opener ........................................... 3-10 Three-point type with retractor .................. 1-25 Storage ........................................................... 2-27Rear power point ............................................ 2-25 Two-point type without retractor (rear center Sun shade....................................................... 2-37Rear seat adjustment ....................................... 1-7 lap belt)...................................................... 1-29 Sun visors ....................................................... 3-14Rear window wiper and washer switch .......... 2-18 Seat(s) Sunroof ........................................................... 2-36Registering your vehicle in another country ... 9-12 Heated seats ............................................. 2-24 Electric sunroof.......................................... 2-36Reporting safety defects (US only)................. 9-22 Seats ........................................................... 1-2 Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-20Rollover ............................................................. 5-4 Security system, vehicle security system ....... 2-15 Supplemental air bag warning light....... 1-21, 2-12 Supplemental front air bag system................. 1-16 Security systems (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ..................................... 2-17 Supplemental restraint system ....................... 1-10 S Precautions on supplemental restraint Security systems (See vehicle security system ....................................................... 1-10Safety system) ........................................................... 2-15 Supplemental side air bag system ................. 1-18 Child seat belts.......................................... 1-24 Servicing air conditioner................... 4-2, 4-8, 4-10 Switch Reporting safety defects (US only) ........... 9-22 Shift lock release ............................................ 5-13 4WD shift switch operations...................... 5-26 Towing safety ............................................ 9-19 Shifting Audio control ............................................. 4-30Seat Automatic transmission...................... 5-6, 5-10 Fog light switch ......................................... 2-23 Belt warning light....................................... 1-22 Manual transmission .......................... 5-7, 5-14 Front fog light switch ................................. 2-23 Belt warning light and chime ..................... 2-12 Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front Glass hatch and outside mirror defoggerSeat adjustment seats ............................................................... 1-28 switch......................................................... 2-19 Front manual seat adjustment .................... 1-2 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air Hazard warning flasher switch .................. 2-23 Front power seat adjustment ...................... 1-4 bag system) .................................................... 1-18 Headlight switch ........................................ 2-20 Rear seat adjustment .................................. 1-7 Spare tire carrier ............................................. 3-10 Ignition switch.............................................. 5-6Seat belt(s) Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-23 Ignition switch automatic transmission Child safety................................................ 1-24 Speedometer .................................................... 2-3 models................................................ 5-6, 5-10 Infants and small children ......................... 1-25 Starting Ignition switch manual transmission Injured persons.......................................... 1-25 Before starting the engine........................... 5-9 models................................................ 5-7, 5-14 Larger children .......................................... 1-25 Jump starting............................................... 6-9 Overdrive switch........................................ 5-13 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ................. 1-19 Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2 Power door lock switch ............................... 3-4 Precautions on seat belt usage ................ 1-23 Push starting ............................................. 6-10 Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-22 Pregnant women ....................................... 1-25 Starting the engine ...................................... 5-9 Seat belt cleaning........................................ 7-4 Steering Seat belt extenders ................................... 1-30 Power steering fluid................................... 8-18 10-5 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Driving with automatic Brake warning light.................................... 2-10 T transmission ....................................... 5-6, 5-10 Door open.................................................. 2-11 Driving with manual transmission ...... 5-7, 5-14 Low fuel warning light ............................... 2-12Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4 Transmission selector lever lock release .. 5-13 Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-12Temperature display ......................................... 2-6 Warning lights ................................................... 2-9 Traveling or registering your vehicle in anotherTemperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature country ............................................................ 9-12 Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ........ 2-23gauge ................................................................ 2-4 Warning/indicator lights and audible Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-22Theft (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System), reminders .......................................................... 2-9Engine start..................................................... 2-17 Warranty, Emission control system warranty . 9-22Three way catalyst............................................ 5-3 U Washer switchTilting steering wheel ...................................... 3-14 Rear window wiper and washer switch..... 2-18Tire Underbody cleaning .......................................... 7-3 Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-18 Flat tire ........................................................ 6-2 Uniform tire quality grading............................. 9-21 Washing ............................................................ 7-2 Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-21 Waxing .............................................................. 7-2Tires V Weights (See dimensions and weights) ......... 9-11 Spare tire................................................... 8-39 Wheel/tire size ................................................ 9-11 Tire chains................................................. 8-36 Vanity mirror light............................................ 2-40 Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-34 Tire placard ............................................... 9-14 Vehicle Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................. 7-3 Tire pressure ............................................. 8-34 Dimensions and weights ........................... 9-11 Window washer fluid....................................... 8-20 Tire rotation ............................................... 8-37 Identification number (VIN) ....................... 9-12 Window(s) Types of tires............................................. 8-35 Loading information................................... 9-15 Cleaning ...................................................... 7-3 wheel/tire size............................................ 9-11 Security system ......................................... 2-15 Power windows ......................................... 2-35 Wheels and tires ....................................... 8-34 Vehicle recovery, (freeing a stuck vehicle)..... 6-15 Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-18Tonneau cover ................................................ 2-33 Ventilators ......................................................... 4-2 WiperTop tether strap child restraints...................... 1-40 Rear window wiper and washer switch..... 2-18Towing Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-18 W Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-12 Wiper blades ............................................. 8-24 Towing a trailer.......................................... 9-17 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-20 Towing load/specification chart ................. 9-17 Warning light Towing safety ............................................ 9-19 4WD warning light ..................................... 5-28Trailer towing .................................................. 9-17 Air bag warning light ........................ 1-21, 2-12Transfer case shifting procedures......... 5-21, 5-23 Anti-lock brake............................................. 2-9Transmission Automatic transmission park warning Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-16 light ............................................................ 2-1010-6 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • MEMO 10-7 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • GAS STATION INFORMATIONFUEL RECOMMENDATION: damage the three way catalyst.VG33E engine:Your vehicle is designed to operate on un- For additional information, see “Capacities andleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- nical and consumer information” section.search octane number 91). ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:VQ35DE engine: ¼ API Certification MarkUse unleaded premium gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock ¼ API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & IIIndex) number (Research octane number 96). or API grade SJ, Energy Conserving.If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, ¼ ILSAC grade GF-I & GF-II.unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rat- ¼ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alling of at least 87 AKI (Research octane num- ambient temperatures.ber 91) can be used. See “Capacities and recommendedHowever, for maximum vehicle performance, fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-the use of unleaded premium gasoline is rec- sumer information” section for engine oil andommended. oil filter recommendation. COLD TIRE PRESSURES: CAUTION See the tire placard affixed to the glove box. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission con- trol devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used since this will ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭
  • Engine coolant 8-9 Engine oil 8-13 Window washer fluid 8-20 Power steering fluid (VG33E) 8-18 Battery 8-21 Brake fluid 8-18 Power steering fluid Clutch fluid 8-19 (VQ35DE) 8-18 Automatic transmissionMeters and gauges 2-3 fluid 8-16 Hood release 3-9 Seat belt 1-22 Air conditioner 4-2 Audio system 4-11 Door lock 3-2 Rear door lock 3-10 Fuel 3-12, 9-2 Spare tire 6-3 STI0232 ੬ 01.9.21/R50-D/V5 ੭